0415702526.pdf
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
![Page 2: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
Conversations With FormA Workbook For Students Of Architecture
London and New York
N. John Habraken
Andrés Mignucci
Jonathan Teicher
![Page 3: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
First published 2014
by Routledge
2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN
and by Routledge
711 Third Avenue, New York, NY 10017
Routledge is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group, an informa business
© 2014 N. John Habraken, Andrés Mignucci and Jonathan Teicher
The right of N. John Habraken, Andrés Mignucci and Jonathan Teicher
to be identified as author of this work has been asserted by them in
accordance with sections 77 and 78 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents
Act 1988.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reprinted or reproduced or
utilised in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now
known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and recording, or in
any information storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing
from the publishers.
Trademark notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or
registered trademarks, and are used only for identification and explanation
without intent to infringe.
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Habraken, N. J., author.
Conversations with form: a workbook for students of architecture / N. John
Habraken, Andrés Mignucci and Jonathan Teicher.
pages cm
Includes bibliographical references and index.
1. Architectural design—Problems, exercises, etc. 2. Architecture—
Composition, proportion, etc. I. Mignucci Giannoni, Andrés, author. II. Teicher,
Jonathan, author. III. Title.
NA2750.H23 2014
720.76--dc23
2014006789
ISBN: 978-0-415-70251-5 (hbk)
ISBN: 978-0-415-70252-2 (pbk)
ISBN: 978-1-315-77412-1 (ebk)
Publisher’s Note
This book has been prepared from camera-ready copy provided by
the authors
All images © the authors unless otherwise stated
Designed and typeset by Alexander Tochilovsky
Typeset in Akzidenz-Grotesk
cover illustration credits
Across, from top to bottom:
Tokyo International Forum. Tokyo (1996)
Rafael Viñoly, Architect. Photo Courtesy Rafael Viñoly
Architects, © Koji Horiuchi
Yoshijima House sake brewery. Hida Takayama,
Japan (1908)
Nishida Isaburo, master carpenter / builder.
Copyrighted photo by Timothy M. Ciccone, courtesy of
the photographer
Kanchanjunga Apartments. Mumbai (1983)
Charles Correa, Architect. Copyrighted photo courtesy
of the architect
Erechtheion. Athens (bc 406)
Often attributed to Mnesicles. Copyrighted photo by
N. John Habraken
Casares, Spain
Copyrighted photo by Maurice K. Smith from the
Intrinsic Attributes of Built Form Assemblage special
library collection of MIT Dome digitized content,
courtesy of the photographer
![Page 4: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
III
Table of Contents
V Introducing Design Play
VII Acknowledgments
1 Introduction
Design Plays
43 1. Zones of Transition
71 2. Articulating Exterior Building Form
93 3. Designing in Longitudinal Section
117 4. Designing in Cross-Section
141 5. Visualization and Resilience
153 6. Working with a Primary Architectural System
197 7. Combining Systems and Controlling Complexity
219 Afterword
239 Additional Reading
243 Index
![Page 5: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
IV
Habraken, Mignucci & Teicher have produced a book that is fundamental for students –
and perhaps, even more so, for practising architects. It outlines a series of exercises
(or design plays) that will increase your observational as well as your design skills.
Each play is lucidly presented, together with cogent examples. Given the state of our
profession today, that’s just what the doctor ordered.
— Charles Correa, Architect, planner and educator. RIBA Royal Gold Medalist, UIA
Gold Medalist and recipient of Japan’s Praemium Imperiale
Habraken, Mignucci and Teicher improve the “reset effect” of modern thought and
technology in architecture and urban design by enhancing the ability to learn by
observing the history and legacy of cities. Both theoretical and pedagogical, the book
is an indispensable tool to project humanized contemporary architecture in the built
environment. In architectural sustainability, the main quality is the possibility of change.
— Josep Maria Montaner, Architect and Professor of Theory of Architecture,
Escuela Técnica Superior de Arquitectura de Barcelona, Universidad Politécnica de
Cataluña (ETSAB-UPC)
Conversations With Form leads students of architecture to discover that design
apprenticeship − learning-by-doing − can ultimately be non-academic, original and
stimulating. The same holds true for professors of architecture who read it − and for
architects, engineers, officers and citizens whose daily practice involves transforming
the built environment. Conversations With Form helps us to understand how growth
and change have shaped and conferred texture to the built environment in the past …
and to what extent a built environment that is capable of successfully accommodating
growth and change can be envisaged and planned, freeing itself from current
functional, abstract, standardized, repetitive and interchangeable codes. A truly useful
and beautiful book, it also confirms that design is a good way to decode and interpret
the processes that have moulded historic cities and their contemporary expansion.
— Franco Mancuso, Architect, Faculty of Architecture, Università IUAV di Venezia, Italy
![Page 6: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
V
The underlying story behind this book begins in the 1980s, when John Habraken
unveiled a radically structured lecture class at MIT called Thematic Design. Although it
wasn’t a studio, the assignments − which he called design plays − consisted entirely of
hands-on design sketches. No one knew quite what to make of it.
As advanced students, we had already put in endless studio hours. Many of us had
worked as designers, some on important projects by renowned architects. A few of us
of were already licensed and more than a few had taught design.
We had been through our share of formal presentations and had the design process
down: It started with the program (building brief), site, problem statement and require-
ments. With luck, it ended with exquisite polished graphics that exuded bold creative
invention, elegance, style … and perhaps the thrill of the unexpected. Virtuoso perfor-
mance additionally included craft, attention to detail and a certain amount of selling the
jury on the presentation. Bonus points were awarded for overlaying the accompanying
narrative with touches of wit and carefully inserted references to abstract theory.
Then came Thematic Design. Our first assignment was literally to transform a hole in
a wall (see Play 1). That was it: No accompanying program, site or detailed theoretical
problem statement around which to craft a design. Certainly there was no building.
And for good measure, there would be sketches in lieu of finished drawings and no
presentation. It was like leaping into a sort of exquisitely slow design free fall.
Louis Kahn had famously opened a graduate studio at Penn by uttering the words
“Design a room” and walking out. Habraken, however, was not using the simple assign-
ment as a springboard for discussing abstract theory: He had cracked open the door-
way that eventually led to reflective performance, to slowing down and thinking deeply
about each step in making form hands-on and to understanding everyday environment
and how buildings had been designed for millennia prior to the 20th century. He under-
stood that we could only contribute to the health and self-sustaining character of built
environment if we changed our way of working.
Introducing Design Play
![Page 7: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
VI
But that emerged later. In the beginning, Habraken zeroed in on small seemingly insig-
nificant design moves. He read them with genuine fascination and discussed them as
if they were every bit as important as the final design: They were, of course.
Like would-be Olympic skiers consigned to the beginners’ slope or aspiring musicians
retreating to basic scales and Twinkle Twinkle Little Star, we began at square one,
breaking down design into small steps and practicing fundamental form making. The
idea was to work with form hands-on, to observe and explore the possibilities that
it presented throughout step-by-step sequences of formal transformation. Working
through each deceptively simple sketch assignment took far more time than anyone
cared to admit. At the end of each play, final sketches on stapled sheets of 8½ ×11
(A4) paper were unceremoniously plopped onto the teacher’s desk.
That time investment led us to think and talk in a new and very different, immedi-
ate and hands-on way about making architecture. We learned to pay attention to the
everyday built environment that surrounded us and to observe, document and attempt
to master the tricks of the trade it embodied. We learned about historical and vernacu-
lar urban fabrics and building types, their complex ordering principles and organic
patterns, their self-sustaining capacity for continuous growth and change. We learned
how form in healthy built environment evolves as the coordinated product of count-
less hands operating on distinct levels through time. Through the mutually reinforcing
teachings of John Habraken and others, we began to see design as intervention within
the broader context of much larger-scale and longer-term built fields. The character,
intrinsic ordering principles and recurring patterns of those living fields were visible at
every scale in a dance of theme and variation.
A great deal of what we learned would not become clear for some time: Thematic design
and design plays had systematically provided solid grounding in design methods and a
substantive common language for discussing them. As a result, we had gone from using
persuasion to sell our designs to discussing design operationally and hands-on − in the
way a surgeon might describe a medical intervention or an expert tennis player might
describe a match to their respective peers. Design plays helped us to develop the base-
line skills and understanding necessary to create vital architecture in a world where no
one ever actually designs alone: the world architects actually inhabit.
Seven extended design plays and complementary observational sketches form the core
of this book. They descend directly from the first early introductory plays − enriched by
the ways in which design plays have been taught and performed in studios, classes and
workshops by Habraken’s students − and their own students − throughout the world.
− AM and JT
![Page 8: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
VII
We would like to thank our collaborators and readers for sharing their invaluable
insight, support and friendship: Jia Beisi, Thomas Chastain, Renée Chow, Alexander
Cuesta, John R. Dale, Christina Gryboyianni, Belén Hermida, R. Thomas Hille, Stephen
Kendall, Kazunobu Minami, Josep María Montaner, Snehanshu Mukherjee, Zaida
Muxi, Rodrigo Pérez de Arce, Henry Plummer and Barry Zevin.
In addition, the following teachers, photographers, writers and architects, firms and
families generously contributed to the rich set of references, precedents and examples
that illustrate this book: Manuel and Francisco Aires Mateus, Alberto Campo Baeza,
Stefan Behnisch, Frank Bijdendijk, Norman Carver, Ana and José Coderch, Charles
Correa, Bernard Deffet, Rose Engel, Herman Hertzberger, Leon Krier, Raymond Lee,
Chan-Li Lin, Wolfgang M. A. Moroder, Heinz Müller, Mauricio Pezo and Sofia von
Ellrichshausen, Norma Price, Stéphane Samuel Rubin, Judith Sheine, Maurice Smith,
Rafael Viñoly, Craig Whitaker and Enric Xercavins.
A number of diverse institutions supported this project in various ways, notably including:
MIT, the University of Puerto Rico and the Imre Halasz Trust.
We would particularly like to thank our editor Fran Ford at Routledge for believing in
and championing this project from the beginning and Emma Gadsden for patiently
and firmly guiding its every step into production. Book and cover designer Alexander
Tochilovsky has earned our boundless gratitude and admiration.
We thank our families for their tireless patience and support.
Above all, we thank our students, for guiding us and allowing us to play along throughout
all these years.
To all – dank u wel, gracias, thank you!
NJH • AM • JT
Acknowledgments
![Page 9: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
0.1 Row houses along a canal, Amsterdam
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
![Page 10: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
1
Introduction
Consider this hypothetical scenario:
A pioneering program to demolish and replace of a number of individual row houses
along Amsterdam’s canals has been approved by a coalition of stakeholders. Key
stipulations include:
• Each new building will be designed by a different architect.
• It will be designed to anticipate, accommodate, adjust, adapt and evolve in response
to continuous and accelerating change in urban patterns, demographics, tenants,
uses, technologies and lifestyles.
• Each selected architect will design forward without nostalgia, with unapologetically
contemporary sensibilities and sustainability.
• Individually and as a group, the designs must nonetheless fit in with the historic neigh-
borhood and structures. Co-existing is not sufficient: Their intervention must build
upon and bolster rather than diminish local environmental coherence and patterns.
Based on the statement of qualifications, portfolio of realized projects and client
recommendations you submitted in Phase I of the competition, you have advanced to
the Redevelopment Authority’s shortlist. Now come the deciding Phase II interviews.
The stakes are high: The Authority hopes that your project will serve as a basis for
developing general rules, processes, procedures and guidelines for architects work-
ing on other sites throughout the historic urban core. The interview will focus on your
underlying approach and methods for architectural intervention rather than presenting
the fine points of form and image in your proposed diagrammatic design.
What specific background tools, skills and body of knowledge will you need to success-
fully undertake such a project?
What successful precedents will you build upon?
What approach and methods will guide and structure your design intervention?
Opening Scenario
![Page 11: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
2 INTRODUCTION
CONVERSATIONS WITH FORM is a design workbook for students of architecture. It
is based on design plays – sketch exercises that focus on design tools and skills that
are useful in any design context and critical in the design of everyday built environment.
The plays share a common viewpoint regarding the underlying structure of the built
environment. From this perspective, spatial fields and building forms – the basic
context within which we, as architects, intervene – represent a complex and highly
ordered system of wholes and parts. They come with intrinsic rules that must be under-
stood through direct observation and hands-on form making.
The design skills emphasized in the plays complement the basic methods taught in
design studio. The need for these additional skills and tools arises out of major trans-
formations within the built environment over the past century, along with a profound
shift in the design role played by architects.
Design and ChangeThe best investment is in the tools
of one’s own trade.
— Benjamin Franklin
0.2 The Great Urban Extension of Amsterdam
(ca. 1650). Drawing from The Structure of the Ordinary
©1998 N. John Habraken , based on a map by
Joan Blaeu
The 17th century ring of canals, streets and blocks that
encircles the medieval core of Amsterdam was laid out to
suit a well-established range of urban lot sizes. Those lots
had in turn proven their ability to accommodate the preva-
lent canal house building type and its potential use, growth
and change over time. Four hundred years after construc-
tion began, individual parts of the fabric have been renewed,
upgraded or replaced countless times. The centuries-old
buildings and public space continue to thrive.
![Page 12: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
DESIGN AND CHANGE 3
BACKGROUND
Thematic built environment
Throughout history, everyday buildings have always shared a few key similarities:
• They are built to grow, evolve, transform and endure over the long term in a complex,
fine-grained and organic manner.
• Their individual spatial and formal character tends to be thematic: composed of
variations based on a series of broader common themes that recur throughout the
surrounding built environment.
• Their form, design and character tend to arise from design decisions that transcend
particular short-term uses.
Such everyday buildings traditionally formed the fundamental building blocks of stable
long-term urban fabric. Rarely was their initial form and organization tightly molded to
suit any specific program. They housed a broad and fluid mix of everyday life, leisure,
production, commercial and ritual activities.
For each individual building to contribute to the overall character, coherence and
furtherance of society and its long-term built environment, it was essential to share
common ground. And, in fact, owners, builders and designers tended to share far more
in common: their setting, world view, way of life, culture, way of building, form language
and underlying understanding regarding the built environment and its broad use. No
one built alone or in isolation. No one built for just one brief moment in time.
For all of these reasons, everyday buildings arose in theme and variation.
Fine-grained growth, change, adaptation and renewal over time
The built environment was ordinarily fine-grained, evidencing small-scale patterns
of individual intervention. Patterns and structures that support fine-grained growth,
change, adaptation and renewal over time were woven into its urban fabric. The overall
layout, dimensions, spatial sequences and rhythms of public space supported small-
scale growth that was incremental and additive.
The parceling of land for everyday buildings was similarly fine-grained. A building lot
was sufficient to provide an individual owner with enough room to construct one build-
ing of the prevailing building type together with an adjacent outdoor space that was
sized to accommodate a range of everyday activities. Those uses included various
kinds of small-scale production, additional storage and eventual building expansion.
Such built-in capacity for inhabitation, growth and change ensured that increments
of change over time could continue to occur bottom-up. Urban fabrics endured and
evolved as a result.
Building types
Many buildings throughout urban fabric follow the same
general schema. While rarely identical, they exhibit similar
scale, form, site placement, structure, spatial sequence,
sectional principles, room layout, building elements and
materials. They also display similar patterns of transfor-
mation through time. Architects often use the blanket
term building type to group such similar buildings.
Vernacular building types evolve gradually. They become
widely adopted only after an extended period of experi-
mentation and refinement. As independent projects
occur across a given urban field, they incorporate many
similar strands of transformation that eventually con-
verge as a rough sort of formal consensus builds around
solutions that perform particularly well. As many people
elect to build in a similar way, the type emerges and
becomes prevalent. Each vernacular type may therefore
be understood as the convergence of countless inde-
pendent parallel processes.
To state this in other terms: Each building type embod-
ies a number of implicit environmental themes. Each
subsequent building of that type presents variations on
those themes.
![Page 13: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
4 INTRODUCTION
Each built environment and associated culture was also selective, steered by individual
acts of inhabitation: Some building types turned out to be rigid and unable to adapt
to ongoing technological developments. Some ultimately failed to accommodate
continuous change. As buildings continued to be built, those types would be bypassed.
Gradually, they would disappear.
Other, more open and accommodating building types adapted easily to many different
uses. Over time, they grew widespread and commonplace.
Non-thematic buildings
The buildings that composed the urban fabric and housed everyday activities were
organized into blocks. In the midst of that repetitive thematic urban structure and
rhythm, a limited number of non-thematic or “special” buildings of conspicuously
different character, location, size, type, construction and/or use were inserted. Build-
ings such as places of worship, seats of government and public facilities were often
conspicuous because of their style, high quality construction, costly materials and
ornamentation. Frequently, they were monumental in the sense of being great in
importance, extent, size, ambition and/or scope.
Nonetheless, at the core, non-thematic buildings – despite their apparent unique-
ness – remained deeply rooted in local ways of building. They tended to be based
on traditional local craftsmanship, building types and materials – supplemented with
the specialized labor of imported carpenters, masons and sculptors who used less
common techniques and materials. Non-thematic buildings joined with everyday
places as integral and essential parts of the larger built fabric. Their combined mass-
ing in urban blocks shaped the public space of streets, squares and other open areas.
For centuries, intertwining public and private interests united with institutions within
this general structure to shape the form of cities and towns and strategically locate
places of particular importance.
How thematic and non-thematic buildings transformed
Within their common setting, thematic and non-thematic buildings responded to
change over time in fundamentally different ways.
Everyday buildings could survive for generations only by enabling and accommodat-
ing fine-grained change. In response to each particular inhabitant, they continuously
evolved through acts of expansion, upgrading, renewal and repurposing, with no fixed
final form. The inherent physical, social and territorial structures of the built environ-
ment enabled individual rooms, apartment units and entire buildings to be transformed
freely and independently. The character and cycle of change and the parties who
controlled change were often different at each scale.
![Page 14: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
DESIGN AND CHANGE 5
Such partial and incremental change stood in sharp contrast to the need for perma-
nence of non-thematic buildings. Whereas owners, professional builders and/or
master builders built ordinary buildings based on familiar building types, monumental
buildings tended to be unique and designed by architects. Brick, stone and concrete
were building materials of choice because they conveyed a sense of gravitas and
rock-solid permanence. They weathered comparatively little and slowly. Shadow lines,
ornamental carving and overall sculptural form could therefore be built to last.
It is important to note that virtually the entire pantheon of architectural history repre-
sents such non-thematic buildings. Although everyday buildings and types have always
constituted the vast majority of the built environment, they remain largely unobserved.
A fundamental shift in form, control and change
When we examine historical urban fabric throughout the world over time, similar
patterns of ongoing gradual refinement punctuated by occasional cascades of rapid
change emerge.
That universal pattern began to shift dramatically in the latter half of the 19th century.
As civilization began to reorganize rapidly in many ways, the effects rippled through-
out the built environment. The scale and population density of individual projects and
of urban centers increased. So did their technical, social and regulatory complex-
ity. Urban fabrics also began to incorporate vast new infrastructures and transport
networks to serve burgeoning populations and mitigate a number of different emerg-
ing pressures. Those pressures and responses heralded unprecedented changes of
enormous social and practical consequence.
Large-scale change now became continuous and ubiquitous. It also occurred with
unprecedented speed and breadth. Change throughout the built environment was
frequently driven by the rapid adoption of emerging technologies in response to
increased functional, technological and social demands. Change and diversity in
demographics, tastes, lifestyles and preferences would continue to accelerate
throughout increasingly networked lives. Behind the scenes, capital, control and top-
down standardization and regulation were rapidly consolidating. Builders began to set
newly networked utilities and new systems and equipment in place piecemeal within
increasingly large buildings and complexes.
As onsite complexity and the need for coordination between trades multiplied, archi-
tects were drawn wholesale – unavoidably, if eagerly – into the design of ordinary
places. Appropriating methods, tools and values developed for the design of non-
thematic pyramids, cathedrals, palaces, villas and monuments, the profession set
about inventing or reinventing not only train and metro stations, government buildings
and factories, but everyday apartment buildings, shops, office buildings and schools.
![Page 15: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
6 INTRODUCTION
The consequences were often severe:
Local building types had been refined over hundreds or thousands of years in a
process that allowed for continuous long-term fine-grained growth and change. They
were now discarded. Architects embraced a new principle: Each individual building or
type would be reinvented from scratch based on functional programming, no matter
how ordinary or temporary the use it housed.
Urban fields that were open to bottom-up small-scale individual acts of transformation
driven by inhabitation were replaced by large-scale projects featuring a very different
and limited kind of customization. End-users were instead offered a choice between
so-called model units that were sometimes minimally customizable. The units were
professionally designed to suit statistically average users based on current abstract
stereotypical program data generated for a very limited range of functions. Their inte-
rior layout was intended to last for the life of the building.
For millennia, humans had inhabited and transformed ubiquitous building types that
served a broad range of uses. Now society would instead shape each project indi-
vidually to embody a combination of function, process flow, adjacency and quantified
program – all based on short-term programming.
That widely adopted practice – tightly tailoring the dimensions and functional capacity
of ordinary buildings based on a narrow and predefined programmatic range of short-
term functions – has seriously degraded the built-in ability of everyday buildings to
accommodate growth and change.
Nor is the problem limited to buildings with everyday uses. Cycles of technological
innovation have become so rapid that construction simply cannot match the speed
of product development: In specialized facilities such as research hospitals, it has
become increasingly common to begin redesigning state-of-the-art equipment rooms
before the interior walls are fully in place: The design is already obsolete.
Additional factors further contribute to early obsolescence in dwellings and work-
places, rooms and buildings of every type and scale. They include the ever-increasing
turnover of tenants and shortening cycles of change in building use, equipment and
furnishings. Such dramatic shifts are of great design consequence and promise.
Nonetheless, they have yet to substantially reshape the design methods we employ or
the buildings we create.
Fine-grained change and sustainability
Historically, continuous incremental growth and change in response to the direct indi-
vidual demand and initiative of inhabitants allowed built environments to thrive, endure
and build richness and beauty over centuries. As small-scale changes built up, they
gradually impacted the collective form of neighborhoods and cities. Above all, small-
![Page 16: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
DESIGN AND CHANGE 7
scale initiative resulted in the rich fine-grained fabric and human-scale diversity that
we witness throughout the streets and public spaces of historic urban centers as well
as traditional villages and towns.
The fundamental ability of each tenant to customize material and space at a personal
scale – to paint, to build a new wing or to modernize a kitchen or a storefront without
disrupting the larger scale – was crucial. It ensured that the local built environment
meshed with inhabitants’ individual requirements and preferences. It also ensured that
the buildings that housed such individual tenancies were sustainable.
As everyday interventions in the built environment began to grow larger, they also
became more coarse-grained, more rigid, more subject to top-down organization
and control and, as a result, less vital. Their ability to accommodate ongoing cycles of
change at varying scales and timeframes diminished.
Restoring the capacity for bottom-up change
Design plays introduce specific skills and observational exercises to bolster design-
ers’ ability to understand existing built environment and the innate capacity of its
varied typological forms. They also highlight the complementary legacies that archi-
tects have inherited:
As architects, we bring a unique perspective and an ability to balance abstract theory
with hands-on practical knowledge, skills and tools. We design both non-thematic and
ordinary environment, both the jewel and its setting. And we must perform each with
equal care and equally appropriate tools.
We now intervene in the everyday built environment’s formerly autonomous environ-
mental processes and contexts to help shape the ongoing sequential evolution of
form. We also design in the broader context of waves of change that continue to alter
patterns of social, economic and physical organization and control of society. Every
design presents a proposal for environmental change. Every act of building transforms
what is already in place. Our design skills, environmental understanding and mastery
of the tools of our trade determine the extent to which we can successfully effect
positive change.
Despite our lofty aspirations, there are clear limits to what even the most talented
architect is able to achieve. Nonetheless, in designing beautiful, functional and sustain-
able everyday places, architects alone can restore the built environment’s capacity for
small-scale bottom-up dynamic transformation. That ongoing restoration proceeds
from the local to the general, one project at a time.
![Page 17: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
8 INTRODUCTION
Interaction between designers
Traditionally, ordinary environments first built out at a relatively large scale. Acts of
inhabitation then further articulated form by building up smaller-scale modifications
gradually. Over time, rooms, buildings, façades and urban fabrics would embed actions
by countless parties. It was implicitly understood that in the everyday environment, no
one could or should fully project, dictate or manage change throughout vast and vital
urban fabrics over time. No one could predict the ways in which countless individuals
acting over time would articulate form.
To accommodate constant change with a minimum of disruption or cascading second-
ary effects, built environments throughout the world evolved and self-organized simi-
larly. They shared a common descending hierarchy of urban, building and interior
levels, each of which became associated with a discrete sphere of intervention.
Relationships between environmental levels – and between designers operating on
those levels – continue to frame how, when and how much change can occur … and
what else it may affect. The urban level has traditionally accommodated smaller-scale
initiatives that erect, modify, renew or replace individual buildings. For buildings to
have long useful lifespans, parts of their interiors must in turn be free to transform
independently, to evolve and adapt to the pressures and requirements of inhabita-
tion. Enabling everyday form to be transformed via bottom up initiatives in an ongoing
conversation with form turns out to be essential in shaping healthy and sustainable
long-term environment. The theme of transformation therefore runs throughout the
design plays in this book.
The spheres of intervention that correspond to each level of the built environment are
well defined. However, the boundaries between designers or between actual forms
are often less clear. In cases such as the transition from private territory to public
space, they may initially occur anywhere along a continuum and are subject to subse-
quent renegotiation. For instance, as canopies, awnings, planters, benches, chairs,
signs, vending displays and street furniture line urban sidewalks, they frequently spill
over into public space and claim it for private use.
For all of these reasons, form making is by its nature dialogic. It requires a great deal of
direct and sophisticated conversation between the various parties in control of form.
Creating livable everyday environments has always required a great deal of interaction,
exchange and – where different scopes of work or levels of environment meet – will-
ingness to adjust form and compromise. That conversation relies upon the ability and
willingness of designers to share a common and mutually understood language of
words and forms. Subsequently, coherent and sustainable everyday built environment
can be built on the common ground of agreed-upon and well-established environmen-
tal first principles, understandings and patterns.
![Page 18: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
DESIGN AND CHANGE 9
Zoning laws, building codes, enforceable design guidelines or covenants and
codes increasingly replace direct negotiation in the creation of contemporary built
environment. Nonetheless, controls, boundaries and guidelines issued by govern-
ing authorities from the top down are a poor substitute for actual conversation
between peers.
Individual design projects are likewise built on structured internal conversation with
form and strategic distribution of design tasks. Communication is further mediated
by the specific forms individual designers control. Team members with divergent
expertise, sensibilities, responsibilities and training must therefore learn to speak a
common language of form and design. Conversations With Form accordingly intends
to help designers become fluent in the language of form – to aid designers in writing
or speaking form and further their ability to consider, execute and control exploratory
sequences of design moves. In encouraging operational conversation about form
among designers, it paves the way for productive collaboration.
In addition to enhanced tools and skills for intervening in the built environment, the
chapters explore seven different basic aspects of environmental fields. Along the way,
useful methodological concepts that arise from hands-on design are also situated
within a broader conceptual framework.
Throughout the plays, form making comes first. Theoretical discussion and under-
standing emerge from hands-on design experience.
![Page 19: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
10 INTRODUCTION
Architectural skill and judgment build through direct observation of what is already in
place as well as through hands-on form making: Just as explicit anatomical knowledge
must precede surgery, explicit understanding of form is necessary for successful envi-
ronmental intervention.
Observation reveals not only how great architects throughout the ages have shaped
non-thematic buildings, but also how local cultures have perfected everyday building
types, forms and techniques over centuries to serve their collective purpose. Legacy
traditions of everyday building throughout the world – from hôtels particuliers in Paris
to canal houses in Amsterdam to row houses in Taiwan – reveal rich ways of structur-
ing form and space that are intrinsically well suited to a specific region, local culture
and time.
Their wellsprings of embedded knowledge are no less valuable to succeeding genera-
tions. Observing, recognizing and documenting the principles and universal patterns of
growth and transformation that guide ordinary form provides the designer with a vast
knowledge resource of precedents. That body of knowledge represents an essen-
tial prerequisite for intervening purposefully within the fabric of existing built environ-
ments. It is an obvious starting point for design. The plays therefore require moving
beyond the confines of your studio walls to recognize, observe, record and reflect on
discrete parts of the built field in a structured way.
Observation of everyday environment gradually reveals intertwined ordering princi-
ples, continuities, themes, types and patterns of form evolving through time. Ultimately,
it leads designers to experience the built environment as a living organism renewed by
never-ending series of partial transformations.
While the built environment that surrounds us remains subject to continuous trans-
formation, that change often occurs behind the scenes. At any given time, the vast
majority of buildings appear complete. They are filled with everyday activity and signs
of inhabitation. Nonetheless, what we observe represents a moment within an ongo-
ing sequence of incremental interventions. Knowledge of everyday built environment,
a discriminating eye and substantial prior experience are often required to detect the
underlying signs of ongoing processes of change.
Observing where, why, how and how often changes recur also makes visible the larger
underlying structure of the built environment. The more reliable and consistent your
ability to spot signs of past change, the more you will perceive the inner workings of
the built environment and how its structure innately accommodates inevitable growth
and change.
Observing ChangeWhat does not change is the will to change.
— Charles Olson
![Page 20: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
PRECEDENT DOCUMENTATION 1 − OUDE KERK 11
Tracing the history of a building’s form is often a difficult and complex undertaking. A. van
Rooijen’s documentation of the building history of Amsterdam’s Old Church (Oude Kerk)
provides a dramatic example of sequential transformation of a non-thematic building. It could
never have been documented without consulting historic drawings spanning eight centuries.
The original church building of 1306 was modest. Over the centuries, that base form
witnessed a series of interventions and transformations executed in stone and timber that
created a new and fundamentally different whole. The building as it stands today, its purpose,
interior and use continue to evolve.
0.4 Interior perspective. Engraving by Jan Goeree, 1680. Image courtesy of
Rijksmuseum, Amsterdam. 1905 bequest of Mrs. Brandt and Mrs. Brandt
of Amsterdam
0.3 Bird’s eye view. Detail of woodcut map by
Cornelis Anthoniszoon, 1544
Precedent Documentation 1
The Old Church, Amsterdam
1306–present
![Page 21: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
12 INTRODUCTION
1306
1359
1330
1370
![Page 22: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
PRECEDENT DOCUMENTATION 1 − OUDE KERK 13
0.5 Transformations 1306–Present. Drawings © 1985
A. van Rooijen. Originally published in De Oude Kerk te
Amsterdam in vogelvlucht (Bird’s eye view of the Old Church
in Amsterdam). Reprinted courtesy of Stichting Oude Kerk
te Amsterdam
1414
1560
1462
PRESENT
![Page 23: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
14 INTRODUCTION
Over the centuries, Rome’s original 5th century Basilica di Santa Maria Maggiore was
encased in a series of interventions, including Michelangelo’s Capella Sforza. As part
of a larger study of urban transformation, Rodrigo Pérez de Arce diagrams the additive
process of transformation from the original basilica form to its present state.
Pérez de Arce shows how the basilica can be understood at an intermediate scale as
a configuration of autonomous parts. Even when isolated from the original complex,
these parts retain their integrity, legibility and usefulness. Each part is in turn composed
of smaller pieces.
The ability to recognize, select and independently manipulate such intermediate parts
quickly becomes crucial in creating sequential series of partial transformations.
0.7 Plan of the completed building by Paul Letarouilly, 18600.6 Contemporary photo © Francesco Scaringi,
courtesy of the photographer
Precedent Documentation 2
Basilica di Santa Maria Maggiore, Rome
432–present
![Page 24: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
0.8 Transformation over time:
PRECEDENT DOCUMENTATION 2 − SANTA MARIA MAGGIORE 15
Drawings © 1980 Rodrigo Pérez de Arce from
Urban Transformations, courtesy of the author
1 The original basilica building
2 Addition of the side chapels and portico
3 Creation of the transept and addition of
elements to the back façade
4 The building is regularized with the
construction of a new entrance and
normalization of the side façades.
0.9 Conceptual deconstruction. Perimeter
buildings with the original basilica not shown.
The new perimeter retains its integrity even
when isolated from the original complex.
1
3
2
4
![Page 25: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
16 INTRODUCTION
0.10 Graphic overview of the lives of
4 generations
0.11 Simple shop with living space above (ca. 1946)
The 1st generation’s building and site when post-
WWII rebuilding commenced
Kazunobu Minami’s graphic chronicle – partially reproduced here – documents and
interweaves sweeping transformations in his family’s lives, their mixed-use row house
and how they used it over the course of 90 years and four generations. Against the
backdrop of family members arriving or departing, marrying and growing businesses,
he carefully documents row house expansion upward and into the back yard over a
period 35 years. Direct access from the street entry on the north to the back of the
site is preserved along the western edge of the long narrow walled lot. As the building
expands, interior courtyards introduce daylight and ventilation along its length. The
façade, which faces out onto public space, remains largely unchanged throughout.
Precedent Documentation 3
Merchant’s House, Himeji, Japan
1946 –1984
SEGUEl-tCl!01' nil' fAM II-""
1&90
,900
MOl,/5',....
,9"
IV 7Q
.".c.... r 1'0 Llvll
DO'
, 4v.f 1,/\11~ '"
4 , Gtll(tA,._S HOP
""As'" ST,toHO
'lSi"""" KITCHEW
COH TIHU 'E ToTWE 8-ItOTIU:J:= 'SHo,-,Se.
";: OM 1 ST. 6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J MA ItItJ"<i&T O "ntf _NO 0," WW1J. <OA,... ....~~ ())
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
IV 7Q
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
6t!:N'Ml"I .~·J
HOPHOPHOPHOP
![Page 26: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
PRECEDENT DOCUMENTATION 3 − MERCHANT’S HOUSE 17
0.12 Expanded row house (ca. 1960). New secondary
living quarters face the garden and the sanitary
facilities have been relocated and expanded at the
time of the 1st generation’s retirement.
0.13 Expanded building and further developed site
(ca. 1984). The greatly expanded row house now
accommodates the shop, three generations and
guest quarters.
Freehand site and row house documentation in plans
and section. Thematic design course drawings © 1984
Kazunobu Minami, reprinted courtesy of the architect
g
S~Of(~S.LL!. fl ot:CAJr,AUA'S", fHC'TO """rU:l"'t..$)
LI & & a[O~
· f 2_. 6r:.,q,.o...·o l't
~o( tr:~e-oV
1ST. FLoo"
A~ WW;. T~ lHE R.En't!,M~
0" "I"'4E I Sf Cre"U-2All QN
'Hl~N's ~
30ltP Ch"'''''TtO''' .6 u t!STS !too"""CLOSU" •
U
s....I"
<"S~Op
' 0(
U-'L1 ... , .... j).&. . lrp 1l.00"'"'.T.&e w. Il. ...."'".."..
o
N
1sT. FLOO"
~S~S
~S~S
~S
~S
~S~S
~S~S
~S~S
~S~S
~S~S
~S
~S ~S
oo
o
o
oCh"'''''TtO'''
"I"'4E
"I"'4E
"I"'4E"I"'4E
R.En't!,M~R.En't!,M~R.En't!,M~R.En't!,M~R.En't!,M~
![Page 27: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
18 INTRODUCTION
URBAN LEVEL
Urban design interventions structure or restructure urban blocks; create, resize or
realign streets and alleys; and create or transform plazas or other public spaces. Only
after urban intervention has defined streets, parallel urban networks and building lots
can building design commence. Subsequently, whenever and however urban change
such as road realignment occurs, it often forces buildings and other “lower-level” forms
to adjust, triggering new and involuntary interventions.
There is always a certain overlap in control: Whether in the earliest Mesopotamian
cities or in medieval Kyoto, rulers have at times strategically exercised blanket control
over ostensibly private buildings, their size, materials, details and decorations, uses
and public faces. In the late 15th century, the planning commission (maestri di strada)
of the newly resurgent Vatican was granted the right to expropriate and demolish
private property specifically for the public good. Thereafter, Renaissance planners
began to experiment with unifying the façades that surround public space for purely
aesthetic reasons. Such interventions were often accompanied by shifts in boundaries
of public/private control.
The first planned square in Paris was the Place des Vosges (1612, formerly Place
Royale). Its architect (presumably Baptiste du Cerceau) designed a unified repetitive
arcaded façade to surround the symmetrical public square. Behind individual portions
of the façade, private owners who had purchased independent lots employed different
architects to erect independent buildings.
Observing Levels and Layers of Transformation
Defining physical hierarchy
operationally
Urban forms occupy a higher level than building forms,
in a particular sense that is best defined operationally:
Since a shift in urban form can force buildings to adjust
while the reverse is not generally the case, urban form
is hierarchically “above” building form. This general
definition of physical hierarchy equally describes the
relationship between the trunks and largest branches
of trees, between arterials and connecting secondary
roads, between streets and the buildings that line them,
between buildings and rooms and between rooms and
interiors. It also describes in operational terms the hier-
archical working relationship between urban designers,
architects and interior designers.
![Page 28: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
OBSERVING LEVELS AND LAYERS OF TRANSFORMATION 19
0.15 Aerial view © 2013 Google Image/IGN-France
0.16 View from the square. Photo © 2011 Jonathan Teicher
Place des Vosges, the first planned square in Paris (1612)
0.14 Ancient Arab-Islamic urban fabric, Marrakech,
Morocco. Aerial photo © 2013 Google Image/
Digital Globe
![Page 29: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
20 INTRODUCTION
0.17 Formal rectangular geometrical plan
superimposed upon an existing square.
Plaza Mayor, Madrid (1619, rebuilt 1790). Diagram
showing original layout of the Plaza del Arrabal with
the new geometry of the rectangular Plaza Mayor
overlay in dotted lines. Drawing © 2013 Andrés
Mignucci, adapted from public artwork onsite
Although Madrid’s Plaza Mayor was initially conceived in the second half of the 16th
century under Phillip II of Spain, it began construction in 1617, just after the Place des
Vosges. In Madrid, the decision to retrofit pure geometry and aesthetic uniformity into
the irregular existing 15th century Plaza del Arrabal required an extraordinary tempo-
rary shift in the boundary between public and private. Existing buildings that substan-
tially interfered with the re-creation of the square were taken and demolished in whole
or part. In some cases, existing buildings that followed the basic realignment and faced
the square survived. There, the crown under Phillip III expanded the public realm to
assume control of every surviving building façade to a depth of about three meters.
The building fronts were demolished, incorporated into the arcaded design of the new
uniform façade and rebuilt as a unitary monumental façade to suit the king’s personal
taste. Control of the reconfigured building bays then reverted to individual owners.
A sharply contrasting relationship between public and private space may be found
in historic tightknit vernacular medinas throughout North Africa. There, buildings
were continuously walled, with little or no façade decoration or other elaboration of
streetscapes. Public space between the walls was kept to a minimum. In that context,
individuals were often permitted to seize and privatize public space – narrowing, build-
ing over or even blocking streets – as long as neighbors didn’t object. That ability of
individual lower level interventions and forms to force major adjustments in upper level
form represents a rare exception to a universal environmental rule.
worj
PANADERIA
C. OE lAS POSTAS
C. OEl PESO REAL
C .OEATOCHA
PLAZA MAYOR
PLAZA DEL ARRABAL
CARN1CEAIA
orj
orj
orj
orjorjorj
orj
orjorjorjorj
orjorj
orj
o oo oooo
![Page 30: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
OBSERVING LEVELS AND LAYERS OF TRANSFORMATION 21
Figs 0.18–0.20 Public Plaza, Isabela, Puerto Rico (2004)
Andrés Mignucci, Architect
0.18 1900: Postcard showing planted parterres forming
quadrants in the plaza design
0.19 1996: Aerial photo showing removal of planted
parterres in which only three trees remained;
addition of an acoustic band shell; and new parking
around perimeter. Photo © 1996 Andrés Mignucci
0.20 2004: Aerial photo: The new design demolishes the
bandstand and reintroduces the idea of the planted
quadrants. Photo © 2004 Kenneth Rexach, courtesy
of the architect
![Page 31: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
22 INTRODUCTION
BUILDING LEVEL
Transformation at the building level most often includes expansion, contraction or subdi-
vision of the building as a whole, façade changes or various other changes brought about
by codes and regulations. It can occur within a brief timeframe or span decades.
Expansion
The need to shelter growing numbers − whether of patients, family members, workers,
parishioners or students − and to expand operations or equipment will often trigger
expansion. Patterns of expansion vary by culture and building type.
As a rule, building extensions are most heavily regulated where they threaten to impact
the public realm. Building the front façade outward is therefore inherently difficult.
Frequently, it is limited by law and requires extended negotiations. Forward expansion
of heavy permanent structure such as arcades, portes cochères or cantilevered upper
stories is increasingly rare: Even when permitted by law, prevailing social patterns
generally discourage it. Buildings may instead extend onto sidewalks using lightly
framed awnings, temporary walls for cafés, planters or other relatively impermanent
secondary elements. Less commonly, the arrival of second-story retail may trigger new
lightly framed stairs.
For practical reasons, extending the form toward the back of the lot remains the
preferred growth pattern. In Amsterdam’s canal houses and elsewhere, rearward
expansion gives rise to modest building wings and also small freestanding “back-
houses.” The latter follow several approaches: In the first, the backhouse is placed
adjacent to a small courtyard toward the rear of the lot, thereby preserving garden
space between the two buildings. Back houses otherwise occur close to the main
house, connecting via a short breezeway and preserving the remaining garden space
at the rear of the lot. Traditional Taiwanese shop houses with similarly deep but narrow
lots developed a similar pattern of alternating courts and back buildings. After building
freestanding structures in back, owners might subsequently infill bounded open space
or otherwise expand to the sides where space was available.
Contraction and subdivision
Buildings may also contract following partial demolition in response to differential
aging, changing economic circumstances, the expansion of public infrastructures,
etc. For example, a building wing or secondary buildings within a lot may be demol-
ished when the street is widened, when they become outmoded or when a building is
partially abandoned after programmatic functions are relocated.
Internal subdivision may otherwise occur. As houses are converted into multi-tenant
space, shifting partitions and redefinition of public and private space transform their inter-
nal organization and experiential character. When such small-scale change becomes a
prevalent pattern, it eventually affects urban density, utilities, parking and zoning.
![Page 32: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
OBSERVING LEVELS AND LAYERS OF TRANSFORMATION 23
Façade changes
Repainting is the simplest, most cost-effective and common way to renew, preserve
and/or rebrand façades (and other building planes), fundamentally altering their
appearance without costly construction.
The next most common varieties of change involve windows, dormers, balconies and
porches. Window openings are filled in. New fenestration is cut into existing walls.
Bay windows pop out of pre-existing window openings. Balconies and porches are
attached. Such additions and alterations occur throughout the course of a building’s
lifetime.
More radical changes frequently accompany the conversion of residential buildings to
commercial use. In Amsterdam, heavy ancient brick façades now hover above increas-
ingly transparent glazed storefronts. When large-scale conversion occurred along
Boston’s Newbury Street, fenced residential row house front yards eventually gave
way to broad sidewalks with terraces and cafés; awnings and other lightly structured
covered spaces; and open-air stairways leading up or down to storefronts.
At times, major façade changes are difficult to recognize because they are universal.
For instance, 17th-century canal houses in Amsterdam originally concealed sloped
tiled roofs behind the sorts of ornate sculpted cornices found throughout the Grand
Place in Brussels. However, 18th-century Amsterdammers routinely replaced the
elaborate old style façades: Simple classical cornices that were far cheaper to maintain
had come into vogue. That change was so widespread that it is scarcely recognizable.
0.21 Theme and variation in storefronts over
time, Amsterdam. Copyrighted photo by
Andrés Mignucci
![Page 33: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
24 INTRODUCTION
Code changes
It is important not to underestimate the transformative effects of building codes. For
example:
• Following the Great Fire of Rome (ad 64), the Emperor Nero insisted that fireproof
concrete arcades be added during reconstruction to aid subsequent firefighting at
upper stories.
• Much later, 16th and 17th century cities that had been devastated by fires – includ-
ing London, Paris and Amsterdam – would outlaw timber construction and require
fire-resistant building envelopes, fireproof party walls and raised fire separations
between roofs. This totally transformed building appearances: Soon, only a handful
of original half timber façades would survive in those cities.
• Subsequently, the Great Chicago Fire of 1871 gave rise to new building laws that
played a vital role in the development of the skyscraper and transformed urban
fabrics and building stock.
• At the turn of the 20th century, sweeping public health, safety and welfare legislation
such as New York’s Tenement House Act of 1901 and the Dutch Housing Law of
1901 and Amsterdam Building Code of 1905 began to tackle the deplorable living
conditions of the urban poor. Similar model codes that introduced standards for
ventilation, natural lighting, sanitation, room sizes and paths of egress were quickly
adopted throughout the world. In reforming urban housing, they would ultimately
transform the fundamental fabric of cities.
ROOM LEVEL
Change occurs far more often in building interiors than on building exteriors. Outmoded
equipment, systems and styles frequently trigger renovation. Constructing false ceil-
ings and walls to cover the existing surfaces is frequently easier, cheaper and less
disruptive than demolishing and replacing them. As a result, careful observation often
reveals series of intact surface layers built up over time. Sculpted plaster detailing,
intricate wooden trim, abandoned hearths, chimneys, doorways, etc. often lie hidden
behind broad expanses of flat featureless surface.
Other factors in room-level transformation include tenant turnover and changes in use.
New business renters bring their own systems, furnishings and branded style. New
residential owners rip out inherited kitchens and bathrooms to make their own mark,
often without regard to the existing interiors’ age or condition. In all cases, new fixtures,
finishes, appliances and cabinets better fit the new end-user’s taste, self-image, needs
and budget.
![Page 34: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 25
Transformation over time is almost universal in both thematic and non-thematic built
environment.
Monumental funerary architecture can be immaculately preserved. However, non-
thematic buildings that serve active uses must transform with the times. When construc-
tion lasts centuries, as was the case in erecting Gothic cathedrals, change occurred on
the fly throughout construction, embodying evolving styles, beliefs, lives, technologies,
politics and economics – or the preferences of successions of building crews.
Small-scale construction within the informal sector – built environment with little or
no professional intervention, regulation or supervision – is similarly protracted for very
different reasons. Urban squatter settlements in diverse settings offer unmatched
opportunities to observe gradual assumption of built form, often following similar
development patterns. Squatters first seize poorly defended territory and defend it
from being retaken while erecting makeshift shelter. Next, each household constructs
some form of gated perimeter to protect and visually substantiate their individual claim.
Squatter homes then begin to take shape room by room. Additional floors may gradu-
ally be incorporated. Eventually, overnight cities such as Guthrie, Oklahoma (claimed
1889), colonias populares such as Santa Úrsula, Mexico City (illegal subdivision
created 1953) or squatter settlements like the former Tetterode factory in Amsterdam
(occupied 1983) grow indistinguishable from the surrounding contextual fabric.
Informal sector building fuses design and construction into one integral process. Each
discrete move contributes directly to gradual and incremental growth and transfor-
mation. This echoes the spontaneous bottom-up process by which countless human
settlements throughout history have assumed form. It also serves as a reminder that
the separation of design and construction – and the intervention of professional
designers within a naturally ongoing process of everyday environmental evolution –
are recent phenomena.
The contemporary professional version of building over time is phased development.
Phasing often reflects project finance and market conditions. In long-term facilities
master planning, it lays the groundwork and establishes guidelines for subsequent
construction when projected user population triggers growth.
In sum, growth, obsolescence and changes in style, use and expectations, demograph-
ics, social values, technology, financial capacity or status may drive environmental
transformation over time. Regardless of why change occurs, it is constant.
0.22 Building over time. Basilica La Sagrada Familia,
Barcelona (1883–present). Antonio Gaudí, Architect.
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
The tradition of building over time carries on in
Gaudí’s Basilica: Construction began in 1883 and
remains ongoing.
Special Topic
Building over time
![Page 35: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
26 INTRODUCTION
Observing everyday Paris
The underlying large-scale structures, cycles, rhythms and ranges of life in everyday
built environments are framed by patterns and inhabited through acts of territorial
control. In-depth structured observation and comparison of built fabrics and forms
eventually reveals which relations hold constant, how they vary and their underlying
common formative principles.
Parisian life and social organization are framed by continuous rows of mixed-use and
mixed-class courtyard buildings with tall windows and balconies arrayed along streets.
The buildings may be imposing or modest, and vary in form, height, width, scale, mate-
rial and stylistic expression, articulation and/or era. Nonetheless, patient observation
gradually reveals common characteristics: Double height covered passages lead to
central courtyards. They are surrounded by three-to-six stories of habitable space that
accommodate diverse uses and social classes under one roof. The buildings typically
pair a tall ground floor with an entresol − a minimal height intermediary floor of “swing
space” directly above. The entresol can house an independent tenancy or attach to
space below, providing servant space, mezzanines, or, when removed entirely, double-
height ground floor interior space.
These common attributes are a vestigial legacy of Paris’s medieval courtyard town-
house or hôtel particulier. The type has evolved in multiple directions over the centu-
ries. Nonetheless, its characteristically dense population, restricted entry leading to
common space and views and its entresols continue to promote highly structured and
monitored social interaction and to sustain a ribbon of street-level neighborhood retail
of all varieties.
0.24 Parisian entresols. Copyrighted photo by N. John Habraken
The Parisian hôtel particulier
One predominant urban building type had lined the
streets of Paris since the middle ages. It featured a
characteristic tall gated first story surmounted by a
narrow entresol story. Closed double-height courtyard
entry doors typically led to a paved central courtyard
surrounded by multistory mixed-use housing rising
three to six stories. Throughout centuries of profound
political, social, cultural and technological change, that
model had continued to create the population density
needed to sustain the mixed use, commercial street
frontage and tight-knit social interaction synonymous
with Paris.
0.23 Ground floor plan of the Hôtel de Sully, Paris
(1725). Jean du Cerceau, Architect. The hôtel
particulier connects to the southwest corner
of the Place des Vosges diagonally through an
entry at the top right-hand corner of the garden.
Drawing by Andrés Mignucci based on
a lithograph by Jean-François Blondel.
![Page 36: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
OBSERVING LEVELS AND LAYERS OF TRANSFORMATION 27
0.25 Highlighting different interventions over time
The Kolumba, Cologne (2007). Peter Zumthor,
Architect. Photo © Andrés Mignucci
The Romanesque Church of St. Columba in Cologne was
destroyed in World War II and replaced in 1950 by a Gottfried
Böhm chapel named the “Madonna of the Ruins.” Zumthor’s
Kolumba is an art museum located on the former church site.
It is treated as a palimpsest in which traces of the different
interventions through time are prominently displayed.
On observation
Experiments deal with intervention into what is explored.
Observation leaves the world as we find it, and is the
beginning of all research. It is not just seeing: It is seeing
with detachment – the suspension of knowledge and cer-
tainty. It is curiosity, before the question is asked.
The answer is the end of observation and the beginning
of theory. The theory leads to understanding, and the
understanding makes us see the world as we could not
see it before. It allows us to see more which may lead
again to observation.
Observation leads to a record – a sketch, a photograph.
But the record is not an observation, but rather the begin-
ning of an answer.
John Habraken, Notes of a Traveller
![Page 37: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
28 INTRODUCTION
Copyrighted drawings by Thomas Chastain, Renée Chow
and Paul Hajian originally published in “Observations of
Turfan” by Thomas Chastain and Renée Chow, courtesy of
the authors
Dimensionally accurate sample drawings from a comprehensive documen-
tation of an oasis settlement
To enhance the habitability of built environment in extreme desert conditions, the
Uyghur, an Islamic people, have evolved strategies including interweaving trellises and
walls to mediate sunlight and channeling water in open courses through their low-walled
courtyards. The observational research focused on how the built environment supports
inhabitants’ specific use of space and inhabitation of public private and realms. The infor-
mation derived from series of measured plan and section drawings of the urban fabric
and its streets, watercourses and courtyards like those shown was supplemented with
quick perspective sketches and photographs.
0.26 Detail plan of individual courtyard 0.27 Section elevation of the courtyard
Sample Observation Drawings
Turfan oasis settlement, China
![Page 38: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
SAMPLE OBSERVATION DRAWINGS − TURFAN 29
Observational field drawings
The ability to observe and record existing built form analytically – to see both the regu-
larity of underlying structures, systems, dimensions and patterns and also what makes
each building unique – involves a number of critical visual cognition and design skills.
Together, they provide a foundation for fundamental activities such as site or prec-
edent study and recording existing conditions.
Observational field drawing of built form as a hands-on method of recording and
analyzing contextual fabric, precedent and form making by others accompanies the
plays throughout this book. Each design play incorporates structured observation.
Each set of observational sketches connects play and related skills to real buildings.
Hand sketches based on direct observation of existing built environment serve multiple
purposes: They may express the qualitative character of buildings and streetscapes
or the overall feeling of place. They may explore the surfaces and textures of forms
and their interplay with light or the interlock between the outline of forms and the
space surrounding them. In a professional context, initial drawings that accurately
depict basic dimensions, proportions and relationships between various parts create
a framework for subsequently recording existing conditions at a high level of clarity
and precision.
Observational sketching is a distinct analytical approach to drawing. In orthogonal
projections with visually accurate dimensions, proportions and angles, observational
sketches seek to document the systemic nature of form, how it:
• builds or extends patterns and systems of dimensions;
• exhibits internal bays and other ordering devices;
• builds-in accommodation for specific ranges of human activity through its careful
dimensioning; and
• builds continuity with surrounding forms, environmental fabric and landscape.
It is equally important to observe the places where form breaks or discontinues its
internal rules and repetitions, where it integrates changes in direction, unique dimen-
sions, geometries, elements, projections, skew angles, secondary systems, materials,
etc. And to pay careful attention to the ways in which such breaks are consistently
resolved throughout the built environment.
Architectural design relies on the designer’s ability to apply hands-on the lessons
acquired through direct observation of form. Architectural understanding of built envi-
ronment bridges visual cognition and formal, verbal and numerical thinking. In record-
ing observed structures in graphic form, observational sketches will therefore often
add occasional secondary notations and crucial dimensions in ways that add to the
expressive intent of the drawing.
![Page 39: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
30 INTRODUCTION
The challenge
Observe, record and present changes over time.
Choose media you prefer
Record your research and observations in photographs, drawings,
sketches, writing and/or video recordings.
Select what to observe
Focus your structured observation of change on the building level.
Where possible, observe a building that has been continuously occu-
pied over a long period of time — one that you like and know well.
Order your observations and findings by category:
• expansion or contraction of the overall volume
• façade changes
• changes to interior spaces
• transformation of individual building parts over time
Approach this exercise as a “form detective”
Seek evidence of change in places where building parts, walls and
materials come together. Venture beyond direct observation to find
out about prior conditions: Look at original drawings of the building,
if available. Interview long-time residents or building users: tenants,
employees, neighbors or, if your selection is a longstanding family
home, relatives. Such consultation provides a superior − and often
surprising − overview of change and how and why it occurs.
Note dimensions
When observing buildings to analyze their design, typological mean-
ing, use and history, it is essential to document their human dimen-
sion, capacities and ergonomics: little of which can be gleaned by
recording their visual appearance from a distance. Particularly as
spaces or configurations approach the limits of a size range for a
particular set of uses, small changes in dimension indicate signifi-
cant changes in potential use.
Look for hidden connections
Change in buildings often occurs in isolation. But individual
changes often occur as part of larger cascades of transformation.
Sometimes they are linked by opportunity. For instance: The best
time to upgrade foundation landscaping may be when the ground
has already been torn up around the foundations and a building
crew is mobilized on site.
At other times, upper level change necessitates lower level change:
When a new water trunk line is installed along the street, each
house excavates sidewalks and yards to connect to it. Similarly,
when a kitchen wall is demolished, utilities buried in the wall cavity
and cabinets mounted on the walls must be relocated. This often
triggers an entire kitchen remodel: a cascade of transformation.
Structured Observation
Looking for change
This initial series of observational sketches is about critically
observing and documenting what is already in place. It highlights
tools, strategies and techniques.
![Page 40: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 31
Order your findings in a timeline
Try to order observed changes according to a timeline. Pinpointing
precise dates is rarely important. The goal is to use sequential order-
ing to help reveal larger patterns and cycles of change and situate
them within a broader context of long-term urban transformation.
Make diagrammatic drawings
For an excellent example of how freehand diagrammatic drawings
help summarize or illustrate transformation, refer back to Kazunobu
Minami’s Merchant’s House in Himeji (Precedent Documentation 3).
Let the graphic presentation tell the story
Enhance your base drawings with site sketches, photographs,
descriptive notes and highlights of key features to clarify your find-
ings. Your final graphic presentation should be clear and explicit
and require no additional explanation. Verbal presentation can then
provide another level of insight.
Don’t go it alone
Observational sketches and graphic presentation may certainly be
created solo. But it is best to work in parallel and subsequently to
share and compare work.
What makes a place worth observing?
This structured observation is based on a building you like. It is
therefore reasonable to step back and ask: What’s good about it?
What fundamental principals of good design does it embody? What
observed principles, characteristics, moments, gestures and config-
urations are directly useful and relevant to your own work?
Do it again … and again
Unlike problems assigned in studio, the intent of the observational
sketches and design plays throughout this workbook is not to
come up with definitive solutions. It is rather to practice a different
approach to design, hone skills, begin to see form in a new light
and let this way of approaching design become second nature,
ingrained in your eye and hand.
We recommend performing each sketch observation or design
play at least three different times in succession.
![Page 41: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
32 INTRODUCTION
In the built environment, there is no such thing as a blank slate. In shaping form, we
bring to each new design a wealth of unique experiences, associations and mental
images. At the same time, we always start from an existing context. All sites have
particular topography, geology, solar orientation, wind direction and history. We
engage in a running conversation with that context, with the evolving form at hand
and with places we imagine or remember. Engaging in that internal dialogue guides
a designer’s process as he or she steers a unique and uncharted design sequence.
About the plays
The first design plays start with simple architectural configurations as base forms.
Later plays start with more complex bases: modules, kits of parts and systems. The
goal is to explore selected combinations of architectural themes and skills while
sequentially transforming the base. The emphasis is on exploration – both of the
unique language of form and of your own creative process. Each cycle of play, obser-
vation and honing of skills will further build your ability to direct and control form while
leaving it open-ended.
The plays cast into a playful format a way of making form that is based on step-wise
incremental change. Like studying a theatrical role or practicing for a concert, they
improve with iterative performance. Different players start at different levels of mastery
and possess different skill sets. Individual performances are therefore at times uneven,
exhibiting stronger formal mastery in some areas than others. Nonetheless, each
design performance, no matter how humble, is creative and unique; each echoes the
unique voice of its designer.
Conversations With Form
![Page 42: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
CONVERSATIONS WITH FORM 33
Design plays are also like board games: Each starts with a field of play, various playing
pieces, kinds of moves, rules that limit how things can go together and objectives. But
play is neither won nor lost. Players simply choose to creatively explore alternatives.
The classic studio project assignment begins with a complex problem statement that
applies a detailed building program to a specific site. The final product is a building design.
Critique focuses on the object, its technical and aesthetic qualities and presentation.
Design plays are not particularly concerned with end product. They focus instead on
strengthening the way designers work and mastering hands-on skills. There is never
a predetermined outcome or problem solution. The step-by-step sequence of moves
from beginning to end is the product to be judged. What matters most is method-
ological consistency, rhythm and harmony throughout the play. While cleverness is
universally appreciated, clarity of purpose and straightforward moves make for the
best plays. While the final move in the series hopefully embodies great design, the
emphasis is on the steps that lead there.
Above all, design plays embody learning-by-doing. The plays are not full-blown build-
ing designs, but short, focused skill-building performances to strengthen form making
skills, strategies and agility. They encourage a natural rhythmic flow of creative and
inventive design moves as architects shape form following their own aesthetic prefer-
ences. The plays involve a form of reflective practice (Schön) that builds connections
between the hand, eye and brain. They focus on the sorts of understanding of form that
can only be gained by manipulating form hands-on.
Surrendering control
As design students, we quickly learn to carefully orchestrate each final presentation
to persuade reviewers.
As a consequence, for many players, the very first design play is the hardest. They know
how to manipulate form. But they fear surrendering control: of the form; the final design
product; the final presentation; and the overall performance and how it is framed. A
related problem is learning to slow down, to listen to form and let it grow organically.
After a number of design play performances, the process becomes more relaxed.
Rather than struggling to envision a compelling form that will satisfy critics then struc-
turing the intervening steps to realize it, players learn to allow design to unfold step
by step. Each move explores the possibilities offered by the previous one. Players first
design a form then analyze it. They challenge the design as a sequence of moves. The
next step is to play several more times, shaping different alternatives and opportuni-
ties, energized by each prior iteration and by recognizing the powerful potential inher-
ent in each successive move.
![Page 43: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
34 INTRODUCTION
Players may have previously encountered theoretically or geometrically driven studio
problems. Nonetheless, many designers initially balk at the notion of generating form
when there is no program to shape design. The fact that for centuries buildings as
diverse as Versailles, Rembrandt’s house and virtually every other row house through-
out the world was created this way doesn’t seem to help.
Here is a hint: As designers we must continuously weigh the relationship of form to
use. The absence of a program does not change that. But building programs have
increasingly proved to be unreliable in the long term, because they are notoriously
short-lived: Uses and technologies constantly evolve. Clients, their needs and expec-
tations constantly change.
The best and most sustainable built environments therefore strike a balance between
short-lived tightly tailored buildings and characterless multi-purpose warehouses of
humanity: Space is irrepressibly “architectural” and impeccable in its detailing, char-
acter, proportions, materiality, dimensioning, lighting and sequence while nonetheless
accommodating a very broad and changing range of uses. There is dialogue between
form, designer and the various uses that they jointly make possible. And it is ongoing.
Another initial hurdle for some designers is the need to engage design in a very hands-
on physical way. Design play requires thinking in terms of the actual components,
systems, configurations and materials that architects bring together in design. In
general, while abstract form makes a statement, materialized form poses questions.
Visualizing physical materials, structures and assemblies, their weights and range of
textures and finishes highlights crucial architectural questions: What is the best way
to span column-free space? What glazing system furthers your environmental design
goals in harmony with the given structure? What canopy detailing will offer a combina-
tion of a sense of secure shelter, protection against the sun and the elements and filtered
light to visitors who transition in and out of the entry? Deeply considered, convinc-
ing and interesting conversation with form and its details leads to deeply considered,
convincing and interesting moves.
A parting observation: Performing and/or critiquing design play in a group intensi-
fies and expands upon what each individual learns when manipulating form solo.
Throughout the plays, you will therefore find direct and indirect references to shared
constraints as well as recurring mention of interactions among designers. But there
is a greater underlying intent: Above all, design plays reflect the understanding that
to design everyday environment well, we must structure design for change. Although
this book is primarily concerned with advancing the core skills and understanding that
prepare the individual designer for collaborative design, the plays have been designed
with the understanding that structured transformation in the built environment serves
as the engine that both compels designers to design together and also structures
interactions between them.
![Page 44: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 35
Foundational Moves set the stage for subsequent design.
They embody overall intent through section, plan and/or ideo-
gram in diagrammatic form. In foundational moves, a designer
begins to envision form in response to known demands and
constraints, creating the framework within which that vision will
ultimately take place.
Systemic Moves establish a guiding approach to steer subse-
quent form development. Such moves may involve the use of any
number of ordering principles: building types, patterns, geometrical
principles, dimensioning systems, zones, grids, proportional prefer-
ences, relational rules, etc. Whatever means they use, systemic
moves are always about applied form making and orderly place-
ment of parts.
Spatial Moves enhance the three-dimensional quality of enclo-
sure and are critical in defining spatial hierarchy. Manipulating the
overall building footprint, its ground form and floor plates, or adding
or adjusting plan, wall or ceiling elements are the most common
spatial moves.
Territorial Moves establish potential public/private dividing lines
and territorial zones through careful placement of formal elements.
They are often closely related to spatial moves.
Articulating Moves further define and detail architecture without
significantly altering overall territorial, spatial or tectonic qualities.
For example, adjusting fenestration, perforating planar surfaces,
detailing railings, adding decorative elements and minor adjust-
ments in shape or dimension may be considered articulating moves.
In seizing upon unanticipated opportunities, Reset Moves defy
previously established systemic principles and reverse prior deci-
sions in ways that substantially alter overall building shape, volume
and/or organization. Such moves in turn require modification of sys-
temic principles and introduction of new physical elements, spaces
and/or spatial relationships. They are potential game-changers and
may trigger a fundamental redefinition of the design problem.
Special Topic
Categories of hands-on
design moves
Architects rarely design alone. Real world form making requires
structured interaction and cooperation. As architects from vast-
ly different backgrounds come together to collectively design,
they often struggle to clarify one another’s design objectives,
find common ground and establish a framework or common lan-
guage to discuss moves.
In the absence of any generally accepted vocabulary regarding
the many specific families of moves commonly observed, here
are some useful distinctions:
![Page 45: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
36 INTRODUCTION
Sample Play 0.1
A transformation sequence
M1 A Structural Move setting up the basic form and system. M2 Territorial Moves establish use zones.
BASE FORM
![Page 46: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 0.1 − A TRANSFORMATION SEQUENCE 37
M5 Roof slabs create partial cover.
M3 An Expansion Move widens the end of the extruded form.
M6 An Articulating Move places trellises to complete the roof system.
M4 An additional Expansion Move makes another bay.
Sequential Transformation Inside Two Parallel Walls
Thematic design workshop drawings © 2010 Alexander
Cuesta, courtesy of the designer
![Page 47: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
38 INTRODUCTION
This sample performance illustrates a designer moving step-by-step to build a trans-
formation sequence – a basic design technique used throughout the book. As in a
board game, the term move indicates one discrete step within a sequence of steps.
The concept of individual moves charged with design intent is helpful in breaking
down, organizing and subsequently discussing design strategies. Above all, it sets
up a designer to think a few steps ahead, always considering alternatives. Each well-
modulated move corresponds to a unit of change.
Play starts with a simple base form. Nothing beyond that initial form is determined.
Moves, playing pieces and the playing field are less predetermined, less limited and
less clearly defined at the start of design than they are at the start of a board game. But
players in both cases similarly add, remove or displace physical parts in the field of play.
Each move similarly adds constraints and/or opportunities that shape subsequent play.
At every point along the sequence of moves in this play, alternative directions emerge.
The process of generating and evaluating alternate moves involves a number of critical
abilities. It simultaneously expands the player’s fundamental design vocabulary and
personal toolkit of moves.
Reviewing design play performance has little in common with formal presentation
critique. There is no final building to judge and the surrounding conversation has
nothing to do with selling or defending a design product. Instead, the specific design
process and formal moves themselves constitute the subject: How do spatial moves
shift material to define or transform volumes? How do articulating moves flesh out
underlying form? The goal is to learn to self-assess such moves individually and quali-
tatively, to weigh and challenge the design process as it translates into a sequence of
thoughtful, methodical steps through which the designer develops form.
For example, in analyzing Sample Play 0.1, consider the following:
• Can you identify any single moves that should be split into two, because the leaps of
design seem too large or too complex?
• Are any too similar or too limited?
• Might some steps have occurred earlier or later?
• Is the sequence too long? Should it have stopped earlier?
• Is the design intent resolved? Are additional moves needed?
• In categorizing individual moves, do any strike you as overly brash or timid?
• Or do you consider any particular moves to be brilliant, strange, dull or graceful?
On the whole, this sequential transformation strikes us as successful. The moves
clearly document the step-wise process through which intent assumes form. Each
move is partial, yet coherent. Each move also increases the overall clarity of the design
intent. Ongoing conversation with evolving form builds in a steady rhythm toward a rich
and coherent outcome.
Focusing on hands-on form making
Just as studio problems replicate in simplified form real
world client building briefs and sites, studio juries simu-
late professional presentations: The designer’s job is to
combine graphic and spoken presentation skills to reach
out to, persuade and satisfy groups of critics and clients
or their proxies. Reviewers then comment on the overall
product and its presentation.
Presentations tend to focus on the final product and
design theory. They rarely focus on the sequential hands-
on making of form and the design operations it involves:
positioning, displacing, extending, shortening, enlarging,
duplicating and arraying elements, etc. Defining parts
together with the design rules that specify how and
where they can be placed is an equally critical aspect of
applied design.
![Page 48: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 0.1 − A TRANSFORMATION SEQUENCE 39
It is also easy to imagine entirely different steps and directions at any point in the
sequence. A second designer could easily take over half way into the transformation
sequence at any point, build upon the coherent steps and clear design logic and move
forward in a similar fashion yet reach a different conclusion. Or else that designer might
steer the play toward a radically different — and no less acceptable — design outcome.
Roughly speaking, it’s a good analogy for the transfer of design control that occurs
throughout the built environment: As buildings continuously evolve, new designers
step in to transform buildings, tenant spaces and rooms, working within parameters
and structures set up by the original architect.
![Page 49: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
40 INTRODUCTION
Conversation is open-ended reciprocal exchange. Back and forth discussion clarifies
thinking and leads it in unanticipated and serendipitous directions. By contrast, steer-
ing dialogue unilaterally in order to achieve targeted outcomes rarely succeeds as a
conversational strategy.
The same holds true in conversation with form. Learning to slow down, pause, “listen”
and reflect − to converse with form prior to leaping irreversibly forward − increases
design competence and confidence. Form “speaks” to the receptive designer. When
form evolves freely and incrementally without preconceived or predetermined direc-
tions, alternatives or outcomes, it reveals unanticipated perspectives, directions to
explore and capacities to develop.
The purpose of freeing design from detailed functional programs, site analyses,
presentation guidelines and similar constraints is not to focus on form for form’s sake.
It is to approach form making with an open mind, to focus on honing hands-on skills
and tools that become essential in intervening purposefully in the built environment.
The plays are structured to help you gain design insight into: how you interact with
form; how open-ended hands-on conversation with form changes design; and how
to recognize the vast possibilities contained in each simple incremental design move.
The goal is to master specific skills and techniques through dialogic exploration of
form and its component parts, systems and systemic properties, themes and varia-
tions. The method is based on creating form hands-on repeatedly, in various ways, one
play at a time.
Design play provides an opportunity to dive in and take chances, play with form, build
experimentally and explore how form works and how it interacts with component parts
and systems. After years of molding design to fit highly directed problem statements
and solutions, designing without those constraints can require an initial leap of faith. It
takes − and subsequently further builds − confidence.
The existing conditions that architects address rarely threaten or pose substantive
hurdles to everyday life. Rather, defining them as “problems” allows us to frame our
own design intervention as somehow providing “solutions.” In design play, the empha-
sis is not on inventing formally, programmatically and intellectually elegant solutions to
problems. Instead, there is an open invitation to join in the performance of an ongoing
immersive symphony of form.
The Art of Conversing with Form
![Page 50: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
SEQUENCE OF PLAY 41
Each chapter of the book develops around a single design play, often in several parts.
Each play or segment begins by introducing the purpose of the performance and
the base form, module, kit of parts or system that serves as a starting point, together
with the playing rules and brief background discussion of related fundamental topics.
In-depth considerations then follow: design strategies and what to bear in mind. Subse-
quently, the text offers sample plays, special topics and thematic and non-thematic
examples drawn from the built environment. It is left to each individual player to decide
at what point to stop reading and dive into a first round of play. Each chapter concludes
with structured observation of the built environment. The titles and fundamental topics
mentioned in each chapter are referenced in an Additional Background section at the
back of the book.
Chapters 1 and 2 concentrate on the articulation of form while introducing design play,
its methodological framework and working vocabulary together with basic concepts.
Play 1 focuses on forms of transition: the configurations that shape material thresholds
and spatial zones in which transitions between opposing conditions — inside/outside,
light/dark, public/private and up/down — occur. Play 2 concentrates on adding smaller
scale elements to articulate, break down and transform large unitary building volumes
and compose building façades.
Chapters 3 and 4 focus on skills related to mastering the initial conceptual stage of
design, when partial information must be synthesized to contribute to a fuller under-
standing of complex form. Plays 3 and 4 specifically focus on section as a primary tool
in shaping form and light. The design of natural lighting employs cross-sections and
longitudinal sections in somewhat complementary ways. In Play 3, daylight becomes a
driving force in longitudinal section. Play 4 uses a progression of transverse sections
to structure three-dimensional design, while testing and strengthening the designer’s
ability to visualize three-dimensional form in the mind’s eye.
Play 5 is a stand-alone divertimento performance. It draws upon and consolidates skills
honed during previous plays. It emphasizes: “thinking form” while visualizing in the
mind’s eye, drawing and model-making; applying hands-on knowledge-based intuition
while making form; and designing with resilience under less-than-ideal circumstances.
Chapters 6 and 7 introduce advanced concepts related to the systemic nature of the
built environment. Play 6 is about working with various systems that define an architec-
ture … including styles. Play 7 combines architectural systems to create larger, more
complex form. Families of form, ordering systems, design in theme and variation and
the juxtaposition of different architectural systems to structure space and form are
central themes of the final two plays.
Sequence of Play
![Page 51: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
42
1.1 Zones of Transition. Casa Planells, Barcelona (1924).
Josep María Jujol, Architect. Copyrighted photo by Mutari,
reproduced under Creative Commons license.
![Page 52: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
43
Start with a small rectangular opening in an exterior wall. Elaborate the transition
between inside and outside in a step-wise sequence of moves.
Think in terms of discrete design moves.
Steer
a sequence
of moves toward
a more elaborate
and mature whole.
Discover
what the form wants to do.
Making a form of transition
touches upon the essence
of architecture
and of territory.
It is therefore
a good place to begin.
1 Zones of Transition
![Page 53: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
44 ZONES OF TRANSITION
No two stoops in Amsterdam or porches in San Juan are exactly alike. They are
variations on a common theme: unique, yet closely related. The common qualities
shared by types of buildings and elements in historic neighborhoods allow them
to collectively shape our image and memory of place.
1.2 Entry stoops in Amsterdam
Copyrighted photo by N. John Habraken
1.3 Balconies in the Calle del Cristo, San Juan,
Puerto Rico. Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
![Page 54: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 45
Introduction
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
Play 1 presents a simple punched opening in a façade wall. Your goal is to articulate
and extend the form beyond the wall plane; and throughout that design process to
explore four fundamental kinds of transition that tend to occur together: light/dark,
up/down, inside/outside and public/private.
Physical transitions between light/dark and up/down, although rich in association
and architectural opportunity, are fairly straightforward. Spatial transitions between
inside and outside will often create architectural space that ambiguously straddles
both states.
Transitions that mediate between public and private space are by far the most complex.
They carry strong social and territorial implications. Whether space is public or private
is always relative. It depends upon implicit cultural assumptions; how territorial control
is physically asserted; and relationships between individuals, between spaces and/or
between observer and observed.
Transitions in design drawings are often indicated as razor-sharp boundary lines and
planes. In actual built environments, they are far more likely to occur within three-
dimensional zones of transition. As they extend out beyond the wall plane of the build-
ing façade, such zones are expressed in highly articulated and intensified forms of
transition. Such physical and spatial configurations and sequences and their accom-
panying zones are fundamental and universal throughout the built environment. The
history of human settlement is filled with familiar examples: doorways, balconies,
stoops, porches, porticos and recesses are as old as architecture.
Each can be understood as a step-wise series of transformations and elaborations
that first began with a simple wall penetration.
Historically, forms of transition have conveyed a great deal of meaning. In embody-
ing a specific culture, they also convey a particular worldview and set of values. They
guide human activities and movement and shape relationships between spaces and
those who inhabit them. When they lead from an enclosed interior to a more public
exterior space, their architecture is particularly rich in associations and further overlaid
with signs that indicate a gradient of territorial control. Such entryways tend to be
intensively designed because of their comparative impact: While they are relatively
compact and therefore relatively easy and cost-effective to elaborate, they shape the
experience of all who arrive or depart.
![Page 55: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
46 ZONES OF TRANSITION
Play 1
Zones of Transition
or
Hole in the Wall
~'1;0
.\)
;\'\~a
~Q0
.\'1
,'11
~Q0
4'(
1.2
0m) 8'
(2.4
0m)
12'(
3.60
m)
~Q0
~Q0 ~Q0~Q0
~Q0
~Q0
![Page 56: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
PLAY 1 − HOLE IN THE WALL 47
RULES OF PLAY
Base form
A base form is the given form from which play begins. The wall and opening in the
dimensioned diagram provide the base form for Play 1.
Site
Play 1 provides no information about exterior conditions. You are free to add stairs or
ramps and create level changes.
Material
The initial wall is built of concrete and/or masonry. Other materials may be added in
subsequent moves.
Goal of play
Starting with the base form provided, articulate an architectural zone of transition for
an entryway. Arrive at a stopping point via a coherent and well-regulated series of
discrete design moves. Your transformation sequence should create a design narra-
tive whose internal logic is easily followed.
5−10 moves
Presenting fewer than 5 moves will rarely establish a coherent narrative with depth.
Presenting more than 10 moves tends to lead to repetitive or trivial moves and to dilute
the step-by-step analysis of form-making strategies.
Final presentation
Present a graphically coherent and easy-to-read sequence of moves. After briefly
noting what each specific move does and/or your design intent, freely insert additional
text, arrows or other indications to clarify your design process.
The play’s the thing
Keep the quick sketches, notes and/or diagrams that you generate while playing. They
provide essential documentation of your design process.
Evaluation
Thoroughly assess each move throughout the design performance and how moves
build sequentially. Avoid the temptation to focus disproportionately on the final form.
Don’t go it alone
Share your work: Trigger dialogue, take in invaluable feedback and let your work stimu-
late other designers in turn.
1.4 Front yard zone, El Vedado, Havana, Cuba
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
![Page 57: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
48 ZONES OF TRANSITION
STRATEGIES
Sketch and explore
Sketch possible alternative directions prior to making each move. After deciding upon
a move, pause again to consider where it may lead and what options for subsequent
move(s) it opens up. At the same time, keep the design loose and exploratory. Balance
careful investigation with flowing design performance. It is more productive to cycle
through two or three alternate passes of the same play quickly than to agonize over
each move.
Backtrack when necessary
Do not hesitate to backtrack and redirect design at any point.
Avoid dead ends
Always pose alternatives. If you reach a point where you can think of only one way to
proceed, you have boxed yourself into a formal or mental corner. Retrace your steps
and carefully consider how and why you ended up there. Be specific: What move(s) or
ingrained design habit(s) led you to a dead end?
Learn from mistakes
Don’t labor over each move prior to committing to it. Take chances: You can always
discard what you don’t like and carry on. You will learn far more by experimenting and
failing than by making only safe and thoroughly pre-tested moves.
In-Depth ConsiderationsGod is in the details.
— anonymous
(frequently attributed to Gustave Flaubert
or Ludwig Mies Van der Rohe)
![Page 58: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 49
Avoid compulsive control of form
There is nothing wrong with engaging in some experimental trial and error as you play.
Articulate oppositions
As you move through each iteration, focus on giving nuanced form to the universal
oppositions that characterize forms of transition.
Move freely, but judge critically
Step back and analyze the contribution of each move in the sequence as you play.
Succeeding within a limited number of moves requires triage: Weed out trivial moves.
While each move should be significant, it is also important to avoid cramming into a
single step what should take place over the course of two or three.
Freely extend the zone of transition
The zone of transition can reach inside and/or outside the wall. Shape the associated
ground plane, allowing it to rise or fall throughout that zone.
Limit design time
As players first begin, each performance often requires a surprising amount of time.
Try to limit each move to 20 minutes. Subsequently, as your familiarity, playing skill
and confidence increase, set a time limit for the entire sequence: As in speed chess,
adding time pressure sharpens intuition, allowing you to design forward thoughtfully,
but without bogging down in alternatives.
Test how well your design responds to a range of human and functional needs
Test the uses your design makes possible through detailed vignettes and scenarios.
Strategize media and scale selection
Plan, section and axonometric drawings can be sketched freehand, hand drafted,
drawn digitally in 2D or modeled digitally in 3D. Compare the limitations and advan-
tages prior to deciding on a representational medium. Some are faster, easier or more
expressive. Others promote spatial and/or kinesthetic design thinking or hands-on
accuracy. Work at an adequate scale: We recommend ¼" = 1' 0" / 1:50 for this play.
Strategize representation
Present your play in plan, section and/or axonometric projection. Maintain a constant
point of view. Develop a consistent graphic approach that clearly highlights sequential.
Step back and verify that the sequence of moves is easily read by others.
Learning from failure
Taking risks in design can undoubtedly lead to missteps.
When failure occurs, it should not be shrugged off as
a humiliating − albeit necessary − evil: Used properly,
failure constitutes an essential part of learning and a
wellspring of discovery and innovation.
The poet John Keats used the term negative capability
to refer to the human capacity to summon inner resilience
in moments of adversity and bravely move forward in the
presence of mystery, uncertainty and doubt.
Mistakes draw out your ability to improvise creatively
and steer design thinking forward in unforeseen and
inventive directions.
![Page 59: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
50 ZONES OF TRANSITION
BEAR IN MIND
Think process, not product
Design plays emphasize consistent and coherent design logic and formal develop-
ment throughout the design process. Each move in a well-modulated transformation
sequence is as essential to achieving good form as the final move.
Trust the form
Avoid structuring the design process to shunt form in any preconceived direction.
Remove barriers to open-ended design and doubts: Open-ended conversation with
form will then instruct and surprise you.
Each move guides the next one
The outcomes of plays are open-ended. A leap of faith is sometimes required along the
way. But success is certainly not a roll of the dice: Base forms and other initial condi-
tions rarely predetermine the path, character or outcome of design: At each step, you
shape the design direction.
Pace yourself
Set and maintain a steady, sustainable and enjoyable rhythm of play throughout your
design performance.
Don’t force it
Nothing is more serious than play. While design play demands full and continual
concentration, try to perform with unlabored deliberation. The moment conversation
with the form ends and the design outcome becomes forced, you have ceased to play.
Firmitas • commoditas • venustas
Prior to the rise of functional programming of build-
ing space, people inhabited built environment by feel.
Homeowners, factory owners and apartment renters all
combined personal and cultural preferences with a highly
evolved natural ability to assess space and figure out how
best to exploit its features for their purposes.
Within familiar building types, the specific use for any
given space was rarely pre-designated. As remains the
case when leasing shopping mall, office or medical suite
space, interiors were often turned over partially finished:
Each successive tenant completed the design and/or
customized space as desired. They would customarily
settle in, partition and furnish space and arrange each
area for optimal use.
That ability to satisfy the needs of inhabitation and use
has often been described in terms related to commodity,
based on Sir Henry Wotton’s rather free rendering of Vit-
ruvius’s famous phrase: firmness, commodity and delight.
Yet with the rise of functionalism, the meaning of com-
modity changed. Instead of capacity to accommodate a
wide range of uses, it became synonymous with mold-
ing form tightly, in essence shrink-wrapping highly spe-
cific programmatic functions. Nor was this approach
reserved for specialized buildings. Even in the design of
everyday buildings created to accommodate mundane
ranges of use, typological design with built-in capacity
to accommodate a broad range of use steadily gave way
to custom design based on highly detailed and quanti-
fied short-term specifications and programs (building
briefs).
Nonetheless, the ancient art of beneficially and sustain-
ably shaping programmatically indeterminate form and
space with broad capacity of use remains particularly
valid wherever tenants, uses and forms will continue
to change. To determine the additional built-in capac-
ity necessary to accommodate varying uses and long-
term patterns of growth and change, designers must
envision and assess the range of uses that a given form
might accommodate at each stage of development.
That broad awareness of capacity and change through
time, when coupled with concentrated investment in a
building’s durable parts, adds richness and extends its
useful life.
![Page 60: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 1.1 − EXTERIOR DOOR OPENING 51
This design articulates form with small elements and details. There are no grand or
expansive gestures. The building material is unspecified; however, the language of
the form indicates brick, stone or perhaps reinforced concrete. The structural lintel
introduced in the last move could be reinforced precast concrete or steel.
Any form will work better in some contexts than in others. All form implies functional
and territorial meaning. At the same time, those characteristics are always open to
interpretation. In reading this design sequence, it seems unlikely that the limit of the
form indicates a territorial boundary: If the space outside the initial wall were either a
public street or sidewalk, building out into public realm — even at this modest scale —
would probably not be permitted. The potential existence of a collective space like
a courtyard or communal garden outside the wall would further justify the working
assumption that the entry steps extend into a modest front yard.
Sample Play 1.1
Exterior door opening
transformation sequence
M1 M2
M3
M6
M4
M7
M5
M8
M0
![Page 61: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
52 ZONES OF TRANSITION
This example starts with the base form used in Play 1. The transformation sequence is
spatially rich, yet simple. The designer envisions the front yard as a zone that extends from
the end wall of a building − perhaps it is a house − to the property line at the sidewalk. Within
that zone, transitional space is layered. Each subsequent move further defines that series
of layers: The first moves − M1 and M2 − stay within the zone of the wall. In M3, a new
perpendicular wall sets up the territory of a patio. This is subsequently articulated by a pair of
columns in M4, a concrete overhang in M5 and a set of steps in M7.
Sample Play 1.2
Front yard territory
transformation sequence
BASE FORM: A hole in a wall
M1 The wall is cut out at the side of the
opening to form a doorway with a
sidelight.
M2 The top corner of the wall is notched.
M3 A new wall is extended perpendicular to
the first, creating a front yard boundary.
M4 Two round columns are added at the edge
of the yard.
M5 A concrete slab placed on top of the
columns adds spatial definition to the
territory.
M6 A low wall adds further definition to the
yard, creating an entry courtyard.
M7 Steps are added, creating a level change
from the sidewalk.
M8 A vestibule is added, creating an additional
zone of transition towards the interior.
1.5 Front yard zone. Commonwealth Avenue, Boston.
Copyrighted photo by N. John Habraken
![Page 62: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 1.2 − FRONT YARD TERRITORY 53
M1 M2
M3
M6
M4
M7
M5
M8
BASE FORM
![Page 63: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
54 ZONES OF TRANSITION
In every architectural commission, the architect acts as a proxy for an owner, exercising
that owner’s legal right to transform a given place. While the resulting built form may
imply or assert territorial boundaries, territorial control always remains open to challenge.
When territorial lines between neighbors are crossed, conflicts may erupt over fences,
walls, tree overhangs and roots, unmarked lawn boundaries, store frontage, parking
frontage, imaginary boundaries that separate adjacent work areas and even armrest
space between adjacent seats. Designers get into trouble by oversimplifying the nature
of human territory and overreaching in the mistaken assumption that they can perma-
nently assign it: When territorial control is successfully challenged, boundaries can and
do shift.
Territory is a hands-on affair, deeply affected by personal relationships and culture. It is
claimed by continuous acts of physical inhabitation and enforced by territorial control.
People in their everyday lives constantly rely on their acute intuitive ability to observe
and interpret signs and assess territorial control based on a number of factors: Who
claims space? Is the claim legitimate? Is it defensible? Who controls access to the
space? When? And how completely?
Public space vs. private space
Boundaries between public and private are even more complex. In addition to being
changeable and subject to reinterpretation and reshaping by legislation and/or taking,
they are also relative. Designers label space public or private − as if it were a simple
either/or binary opposition − absolute, clear-cut, predetermined and unchanging.
However, careful long-term observation of the many forms of public/private transition
demonstrates that the underlying relationships, patterns and gradations of territorial
control are relative rather than absolute. They transcend simplistic demarcation. Space
that one cannot enter is private. However, viewed from within, space will appear to be
comparatively more or less public. It depends upon whether one can restrict others
from entering:
Special Topic
Territory
![Page 64: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 55
Imagine tenants who share an apartment in a wing of a restricted entry apartment
building. It is situated on a lane within a gated community: As one roommate steps out
of her private bedroom, she encounters a stranger in the living room, someone admit-
ted by her housemate. We recognize at once that she has entered the collective or
“public” space of the shared dwelling because she no longer exclusively controls who
may enter. Nonetheless, from the perspective of outsiders, the living room is every bit
as private as her bedroom.
Subsequently, she passes into the corridor, then into the lobby. At each transition, she
encounters others with equal rights to inhabit that particular limited-access space. Yet
she is clearly passing into progressively more public spaces. Nonetheless, to pass-
ersby on the lane, all parts of the building remain equally private and off-limits. Finally,
she exits the building and enters the “public” grounds of the enclave. That territory is
simultaneously private to everyone denied entry beyond the gatehouse.
Marking and interpreting territory
Architectural design often deliberately exploits the ambiguous overlap of form and
territory. It sometimes extends the zone of transition to highlight the experience of
transition. In other cases, such as when individually owned buildings are arrayed
across an unbroken expanse of lawn, territorial transition is visually negated.
Public/private boundaries and transitions are otherwise often marked by durable
stone, metal or wooden posts, walls, fences, gates and doors. Territorial claims may
otherwise be softer or less permanent: a potted plant on a table or an umbrella stand
set in a corridor beside an apartment entry; café tables set out onto the sidewalk each
morning; a tarpaulin set above a vendor’s booth at a weekly market; or even a combina-
tion of beach umbrella and towels set out on the sand.
Territorial interpretation also varies from culture to culture. In North America, an open
office door is an open invitation to barge in; in other settings, poking one’s head unan-
nounced into private space through an office door left ajar represents territorial trans-
gression. Building configurations − porches, level changes or overhanging elements
such as awnings, eaves and balconies − may carry no intrinsic territorial meaning yet
be misinterpreted as zones of transition from public to private.
![Page 65: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
56 ZONES OF TRANSITION
This sequence explores the transformation of a hole-in-the-wall at an upper floor. In fact, we
observe two narratives: One moves inward from the wall plane; the other moves incremen-
tally outward. In claiming both interior and exterior space, this play broadens the relationship
between them and expands the zone of transition in both directions. Relative to the exterior
plane of the façade, this transformation sequence moves from M1 − where the zone claims
part of the interior space − to M6, in which it claims part of the exterior space.
Because the transformation sequence is depicted in cross-section only, a great deal remains
unknown. For instance: Without the missing dimension, our ability to read spatial qualities or
territory in the form remains quite limited. Each move might simply represent one in an array
of moves that repeat throughout the three-dimensional form.
Nonetheless, the series as a whole offers a different sort of completeness and consistency:
While each move represents a fairly broad step, the progression of forms is logical, intuitive
and depicted with a consistently high degree of specificity. The detailing portrays exactly
how banisters, balcony cantilevers and awnings are shaped. Their elements and vocabulary
clearly belong to a specific “family” that is defined by a combination of particular forms and
styles. Together, they comprise a kit of parts or library of elements with which one might
systematically design any number of alternative façades in theme and variation.
Sample Play 1.3
Claiming territory at the façade plane
The façade plane is indicated in yellow fill.
M -1 An indentation in the façade plane
creates a loggia: The outside claims the
inside.
M0 The starting façade plane
M1 A narrow extension (the dimension of the
wall material) known as an antepecho
M2 A balcony
M3 The balcony is covered.
M4 A post is added to support the roof.
M5 The balcony is glazed to create a bay
window.
M6 The bay is walled-in to form part of the
interior: The inside claims the outside.
M -1 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
![Page 66: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 1.3 − CLAIMING TERRITORY AT THE FAÇADE PLANE 57
1.6 Claiming territory at the façade plane. Plaza de la
Leña, Pontevedra, Spain. Photo © 1982 Maurice K.
Smith, courtesy of the photographer
Note the building with an arcade on the ground level, fenestration elements
flush with the plane of the façade in the middle zone and a bay window
extending out beyond the façade in the top zone. The range of form-making
strategies presented by such groupings of buildings can be recorded in a
transformation sequence, using the façade plane as a reference datum.
![Page 67: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
58 ZONES OF TRANSITION
Sample Play 1.4
Vernacular building as
design precedent
1.7−1.10 Typological variations on one particular theme −raised and
covered entry porches in Ponce, Puerto Rico. Copyrighted photos
by Andrés Mignucci
![Page 68: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 1.4 − VERNACULAR BUILDING AS DESIGN PRECEDENT 59
1.12 Street sections through balconies. Ponce Documentation Project.
Directed by Jorge Rigau. Drawings © 1984 Colegio de Arquitectos y
Arquitectos Paisajistas de Puerto Rico, reprinted courtesy of CAAPPR
1.11 Street elevation. Ponce Documentation Project. Directed by Jorge Rigau.
Drawings © 1984 Colegio de Arquitectos y Arquitectos Paisajistas de Puerto
Rico, reprinted courtesy of CAAPPR
![Page 69: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
60 ZONES OF TRANSITION
Design play offers an open-ended alternative to designing toward a predetermined form. This
particular transformation sequence, however, deliberately aims to create a thematic variant
of a particular vernacular form. Such porch entryway configurations are common throughout
the historic center of the town of Ponce, Puerto Rico and more generally throughout the
Caribbean. The play focuses on the composition of parts, the spatial structure of the zone
of transition and the four key accompanying transitions: inside/outside, light/dark, public/
private and up/down.
The design grows through step-wise addition of posts, railings, exterior roofs and level
changes immediately beyond the wall. Together, the moves build a layered sequence of
transitions that jointly mediate between inside and outside. The roof protects the balcony
while simultaneously creating a transition from light to dark: from sunlit sidewalk to shaded
entry porch to the far darker interior.
The level change between the porch and the sidewalk illustrates one characteristic move of
transitions from public to private: The combination of turning and rising establishes a more
private upper level.
BASE FORM: A hole in a wall
M1 The wall is cut below the opening to form
a doorway.
M2 Additional door openings are added on
either side.
M3 A step-up is created at the threshold
between the exterior platform and the
building interior.
M4 A set of steps is added, indicating that
the platform and ground floor are above
grade.
M5 A low wall establishes the edge of the
platform and steps.
M6 A railing transforms the platform into an
open terrace or porch.
M7 Four posts are added to the railing in
anticipation of a roof.
M8 A metal roof covers the porch.
M9 A parapet extends above the roof and a
sidewalk is added outside the porch.
Sample Play 1.4
Vernacular building as
design precedent
BASE FORM
1.13 Continuity and variation in the zone of
transition between public and private
Ponce, Puerto Rico. Copyrighted photo by
Andrés Mignucci
![Page 70: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 1.4 − VERNACULAR BUILDING AS DESIGN PRECEDENT 61
M1 M2 M3
M4
M7
M5
M8
M6
M9
![Page 71: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
62 ZONES OF TRANSITION
Special Topic
Claiming exterior space inside
the exterior wall
1.14 Trinity Church Rectory. Boston (1879)
H. H. Richardson, Architect. Photo ca. 1885 courtesy
of Trustees of the Boston Public Library
Entryway zones of transition need not occur outside the building. In dense urban envi-
ronments where the façade coincides with the property line, transitions often occur
behind the plane of the façade. This occurs, for example, in H. H. Richardson’s Trinity
Church Rectory. The archway that defines the entry and serves as a zone of transition
contains steps that negotiate the level change between the sidewalk and building
interior. In such instances, while the zone of transition may be well defined, the territory
of the expanded threshold straddles public and private space ambiguously.
![Page 72: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 63
Havana and Bologna both feature streets lined with buildings whose carved façades
form continuous urban networks of covered public space. Nonetheless, the urban
fabric and character of their respective arcade spaces differ significantly.
Bologna’s portici are fine-grained. As row houses were added on by new owners, the
portici built up over time as an accretion of individual acts. Consequently, columns,
arches and courtyard entries vary thematically from building to building as they carve a
public right of way through what is clearly a string of individual territories.
By contrast, Havana’s two-story arcades were created in block-long interventions at an
institutional scale with uniform and repetitive detailing. Small-scale individual changes
have gradually customized the façade at ground level. Nonetheless, while walking
through a Bolognese arcade often feels like passing through a series of private places,
the fundamentally institutional and public character of Havana’s arcades is reinforced
by the scale and underlying uniformity of the structure.
1.16 Arcade. Bologna. Copyrighted photo by
N. John Habraken
1.15 Arcade. Havana, Cuba. Copyrighted photo by
Andrés Mignucci
![Page 73: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
64 ZONES OF TRANSITION
1.17 Exterior. Copyrighted photo by Francesc Català-
Roca, courtesy of Arxiu Coderch
1.18 Double-walled balconies. Copyrighted photo by
Francesc Catalá-Roca, courtesy of Arxiu Coderch
Casa de la Marina − La Barceloneta, Barcelona (1955)
In José Antonio Coderch’s apartment building, screened balconies recede from the
façade plane to create spaces that mediate between inside and outside. The screen is
composed of floor-to-ceiling jalousie windows that mitigate the harsh direct sunlight,
allow for ventilation and lend visual privacy to the interior. This design strategy allows
the building envelope to read as a unified whole while the balcony functions as both
interior and exterior space.
1.19 Floor plan. Copyrighted drawing courtesy of Arxiu Coderch
![Page 74: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 65
Kanchanjunga Apartments, Mumbai (1983). Charles Correa, Architect
Charles Correa’s Kanchanjunga Apartments in Mumbai display literal carving into the
building form. Alternating double-story spaces are cut away at the corners to create
terraces that overlook the Arabian Sea and Mumbai Harbor. This offers the high-rise
residents substantial exterior living space.
1.21 Terrace. Copyrighted photo courtesy of the architect
1.20 Exterior. Copyrighted photo courtesy of the architect
![Page 75: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
66 ZONES OF TRANSITION
1.22 Early 20th century urban fabric in Rotterdam
displays a wide range of modest moves based
on articulation of wall openings
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
1.23−1.24 Violeta 113. San Juan, Puerto Rico. Andrés Mignucci, Architect.
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
Special Topic
Claiming interior space beyond
the exterior wall
![Page 76: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 67
1.25 Watanabe House. Sekigawa, Tsuruoka, Japan
Photo © Norman F. Carver, Jr., reprinted with
permission
Territorial zones claim exterior space with series of layered overhangs, columns, steps
and paving surfaces.
![Page 77: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
68 ZONES OF TRANSITION
Play 1 highlights form in relation to transition. Observing and documenting zones and forms
of transition in vastly different contexts leads to recognition of how varying strategies relate
to different cultural, climatic, geographical and class contexts, as well as varying eras and
preferred building systems. Over time, built up understanding allows a designer to abstract
and understand their organizational schemas, build a broad repertoire or vocabulary of
design strategies and moves and translate structured observation of forms of transition
directly into hands-on design throughout the design process. Designing forms of transition
successfully also requires a basic understanding of territory and of public vs. private.
The challenge
Observe and document zones of transition that mediate between four basic opposing
conditions: light/dark, inside/outside, public/private and up/down.
Select what to observe
Zones of transition occur at different environmental levels and scales. To start, choose
a coherent neighborhood or urban district that favors one predominant building type.
Focus on the zone of exchange where building meets street. While documenting the
range of forms of transition, note those whose materiality, dimension, position and/or
direction recur consistently, perhaps in theme and variation.
Order the zones you observe according to how they relate to the façade:
• zones that claim interior space
• zones that straddle inside and outside
• zones that claim exterior space
Order your observations of zones by type:
• thresholds that provide different gradients and levels of light
• public and private space and associated territorial zones
• zones that mediate height changes
• zones of transition between the building and public space beyond (i.e., the some-
times extensive zones within which various elements move in or out relative to the
wall planes of façades)
Visualize the spatial layers within the zones of transition:
• How many can you identify?
• What is the size range of elements associated with such zones?
• Do the elements themselves exhibit a common dimensional system or range of sizes?
It’s not the napkin sketch,
but what follows …
Publishing early doodles and napkin sketches became
fashionable in the 20th century. However brilliance lies
less in such early sketches than in the architect’s ability
to recognize and pursue their potential. Inspired design
builds upon a strong and consistent design process.
Successful architecture may or may not incorporate
striking new forms, but it is always founded on broad
knowledge of what is already in place. Inspiration favors
the prepared mind.
Structured Observation
Zones and forms of transition
![Page 78: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 69
Create visual models of characteristic gradations or progressions
Define a characteristic range for a quality such as private/public. In expressing that
range, try to define whether it changes in a fairly uniform gradient, or in a series of ranges
that is discontinuous.
Are particular building elements and experiential qualities associated with certain levels of
particular characteristics? For instance: Building interiors represent relatively enclosed
and private interior space with fairly limited direct sunlight. By contrast, sidewalks often
offer sun-drenched, open and unprotected public space. Experientially, front porches,
stoops and walkways through front lawns each fall somewhere between those extremes.
As you document different transitional elements and spaces, do they tend to fall within
recurring dimensional ranges?
Record materials, components and building systems
They are integral to the evolution and realization of the form.
Note recurring transitions
Observe the endless variety of styles, materials, sizes, placements and functional uses of
doors, steps, awnings, porches, balconies, recesses and other basic transitional forms.
They vary widely between cultures, but also within each building culture. The elements
of their design may be elaborate or straightforward, simple or complex, pointedly archi-
tectural or utterly unselfconscious. The important thing is to observe, record and master
real-world forms and ultimately to translate that understanding in ways that strengthen
your design.
Remember the flow of people, fundamental processes and things
Observe and record how people and things enter and exit and where they pause as they
flow into or out of public space: The rituals surrounding the receiving of visitors and pack-
ages are complex. Arrivals may signal their appearance then wait to be admitted. Entry
may entail signaling arrival, setting down loads, shedding exterior protection, wayfinding
and scanning signs, fishing out keys, signing in, leaving notes, making deliveries, etc.
Sketching, photographing or describing people’s behavior relative to a form of transition
is as important as observing the form itself.
Select media
Document this observation through some combination of photographic, annotated
drawing and sketch images.
Consolidate your knowledge by transforming observations into transfor-
mation sequences
Directly apply what you observe to what you design: Generate one or more new transfor-
mation sequences that begin with the Base Form.
![Page 79: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
70
The “Painted Ladies” of Alamo Square
2.1 San Francisco, California (19th century). Victorian-era builders relied on pattern books and
industrial manufacturers’ catalogues of parts to build vast neighborhoods of ornate wood-frame houses
in theme and variation. Photo © Bernard Gagnon, courtesy of the photographer
![Page 80: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
71
Start with the basic massing of a simple building and articulate it in series of smaller-
scale exterior transformations
Place
articulating elements
such as
windows and doors,
dormers and
bay windows,
porches,
balconies and recesses
to enrich a
single large volume
and relate it
to human scale.
2 Articulating Exterior Building Form
![Page 81: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
72 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
Introduction
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
Play 2 explores a venerable two-step approach to the design of form that is coherent
and expressive, focusing on the building exterior. Design starts with a basic overall
typological building volume. First, that simple base form is transformed in a series of
localized massing moves that extrude or carve out comparatively small parts. Subse-
quent articulating moves add on or insert building parts or configurations of parts.
Play 2 explores the following topics in focusing on the operational and sequential
relationship between individual parts, the larger configurations they form and their
relationship to the façade and overall volume:
• composing the hierarchical organization, ordering principles and structure of build-
ing parts
• designing and articulating overall building form through an additive sequence of
smaller-scale moves that follow implicit rules
• setting human-scale architectural elements and configurations in place to articulate
the larger design
• negotiating between continuity and invention; between inserting unique buildings
and parts into existing contexts and building continuity with what is already in place
and observable
• understanding how composing building elements in varying ways determines the
range of available design moves and affects overall design
• observing how the particular order in which articulating design moves occur within
the overall sequence may affect design outcomes
2.2 C.A. Belden House. San Francisco (1889)
Walter J. Matthews, Architect. Photo © 2008 Michael
B. Hofmann, courtesy of the photographer
2.3 Bay Windows. “Commonwealth Avenue, in Boston’s
Back Bay,” copyrighted photo by Ken Bergman,
courtesy of the photographer
![Page 82: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 73
This play requires working synchronously from a number of points of view. Players must
design from the outside in and from the inside out. They must simultaneously respond
to the overall form’s larger and smaller scale spaces, potential uses and territories.
At its best, articulating primary form by adding discrete smaller-scale secondary moves
and parts is strategic: It reflects construction common sense, while also offering great
flexibility of use and creating opportunities for playful or profound thematic variation.
When designers intervene within established vernacular urban settings, it provides a
mechanism for balancing self-expression with contextual continuity: Each step in the
design sequence provides the designer with opportunities to incorporate the shared
contextual language of moves, patterns and add-on parts, reinterpret it or lead form in
an entirely new direction.
The evolving transformation of thematic (vs. non-thematic) buildings
A principal difference between thematic and non-thematic buildings is apparent in the
character of their primary volumes. Non-thematic buildings − particularly monumental
ones − often start out as comparatively complex initial forms.
The form of everyday buildings may evolve over time through series of interventions
to become equally complex. Historically, however, it is unusual for their initial massing
to incorporate irregular large-scale secondary geometries or skew angles. When such
shifts do occur, they generally respond to local conditions or large-scale, cosmological
and/or ritual requirements rather than aesthetic impulses of the designer. Building
parts orient to cardinal directions and sacred mountains, but rarely for conceptual
reasons, such as distant shifts in the urban grid.
The process and sequence of transformation is also very different: One or two smaller-
scale volumetric moves at most may be introduced into the simple massing of ordinary
buildings. Exterior articulation is achieved primarily by adding-on small-scale building
elements such as porticos, porches, balconies, dormers, windows and doors. Articu-
lation is otherwise the result of carving out or stepping back the building volume to
create protected exterior space such as arcades.
Throughout the world, distinct cultures historically produced their own architectural
repertoire of add-on elements. Mashrabiyas in Cairo, galerias acristaladas (glazed
balconies) in Galicia, Boston bay windows and minimal depth French balconies
throughout Paris embody fundamentally local or regional responses to geography,
climate, use and culture.
By the late 18th century, however, the environmental game had changed: Widespread
industrialized mass production of building components had begun to introduce new
and unfamiliar parts and configurations to distant markets, greatly expanding the local
vocabulary within longstanding traditions of additive articulation. In the 19th century,
intensive building activity often incorporated new styles that relied on remotely
2.4 Mashrabiya. Bayt al-Kritliyya House (Gayer-
Anderson Museum), Cairo (1642). Copyrighted photo
by Berthold Werner, courtesy of the photographer
2.5 Informal façade alterations and add-on
configurations. Bastia, Corsica. Copyrighted photo
by Jonathan Teicher
![Page 83: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
74 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
and industrially produced building parts to create neighborhoods of a distinct new
character:
• Ornate Victorian residential architecture spread in conjunction with the everyday
use of factory-produced wooden detailing and ornament. It was further popularized
by the widespread distribution of builders’ pattern books.
• The industrial manufacture of ornamental cast iron building elements came to define
urban districts as different as Manhattan’s SoHo and the Vieux Carée of New Orleans.
• Subsequently, the 20th century use and aesthetic of streamlined industrial building
products such as concrete, steel and aluminum became a driving force behind vari-
ous movements worldwide.
In the 21st century, traditional ways of designing, producing and styling familiar build-
ing types persist. However, as the character of built environment grows increasingly
diverse, traditional building types and forms now coexist with buildings that house
evolving lifestyles and settings with technical, material and stylistic innovation. Neigh-
borhoods often incorporate any number of interspersed building types, patterns,
systems, parts and materials.
In the resulting cross-fertilization, everyday architecture and its regional typologies
and construction methods continue to evolve. When change originates in the informal
sector, it occurs primarily one building at a time, through small-scale bottom-up acts
of accretion and articulation, with materiality and detailing that combines both tradi-
tional and more contemporary ways of building. Professional architecture that tends to
involve larger non-thematic projects often straddles tradition and innovation in a fusion
of new and traditional forms, materials, systems and building methods.
![Page 84: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
PLAY 2A − ARTICULATING EXTERIOR FORM IN A TWO-STEP PROCESS 75
This simple base form features a gabled roof profile of the sort found throughout
temperate climates. Start with the base form and transform it in two ways: First, extend
the form or subtract from it in a short sequence of volumetric moves that refine the
overall mass and profile of the basic building. Next, select smaller-scale architectural
elements to add on to the larger volume in a series of secondary articulating moves.
Observe the extent to which secondary articulation determines the overall character
and experience of the architecture.
Play 2a
Articulating Exterior Building Form
in a Two-Step Process
~?
....
O•
.~~
8'
'2.-20
4m
12'(
3.6
m)
10'(
3m
)10
'(3m
)8
'(2
.4m
)
204m
204m
204m
204m
![Page 85: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
76 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
RULES OF PLAY
Base form
The base form defines the volume of an entire building, complete with plan dimensions
and floor heights.
Order of play
First refine the overall volume. Then add articulating moves.
Vertically zone the placement of parts in advance
Develop initial rules about the placement of specific secondary elements: Should a
given part be placed in the base, middle and/or top zone?
Base form material
Players may choose to leave the basic materials of the overall volume unspecified
during a quick initial pass at design. However, defining materials and underlying build-
ing systems offers helpful additional constraints and an incentive to further articulate
the character, construction and connections of the elements.
Keep the base form clearly in view
Maintain the basic underlying building form as a prominent and easily read design
element throughout the play sequence.
Create a coherent selection of secondary articulating elements
Compose a palette of add-on elements − either prior to starting or during design.
Observe how careful selection of a limited palette helps to control the design process.
Work simultaneously at multiple scales
Play each volumetric or façade move on multiple levels: Transform the form locally
while simultaneously taking into account the broader overall context of the design and
adjusting it accordingly.
Strive for coherence
Make certain that the design as a whole is coherent. (You need not design all four
elevations.)
Avoid rigidity
Improvise as you design. Allow yourself some leeway when it comes to enforcing pre-
established dimensional or other zoning guidelines, expanding the selection of add-on
elements and refining or making special exceptions to placement rules. Consistency
need not be absolute. Above all, listen to the form: Bend the rules as the form requires.
Media
Choose freely. If you opt to design digitally, create you own library of parts.
![Page 86: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 77
In-Depth Considerations
STRATEGIES
All articulating moves are not equal
Add-on elements can significantly influence overall form by virtue of their size, complex-
ity, location, meaning, degree of privacy or core connection to principal activities within
the building. Some relatively minor autonomous façade elements may be introduced in
any order. However, the sequence of addition may strongly affect subsequent devel-
opment. For instance, adding a building entry − no matter how minor − establishes
or transforms building circulation and implies a broad organizational schema for the
entire building.
Classify add-on elements by zone
It is useful to list and classify exterior façade elements according to their presence
within the base, middle and/or top zone. Observe that the form, use, character and/or
detailing of elements will often change as they recur in different zones.
Run regulating zones and regulating lines vertically through the building
Regulating zones and lines can be expressed prominently through modifications to the
base volume. Or they may simply be used as an invisible means of organizing the place-
ment of autonomous elements. Major regulating lines tend to reinforce formal axes.
Consider proportions
Reinforcing geometrical consonance between smaller individual parts and the larger
whole with every move is essential to this design performance.
Create dimensional systems
A related technique for establishing continuity throughout any three-dimensional built
field is the repetition − both vertically and horizontally − of key families of dimensions
that are linked to the human body and to fundamental usable ranges of size, as in Le
Corbusier’s Modulor.
Imprint form with human scale and use
Specific architectural configurations become associated with particular ranges of
use, placement, dimension and proportion for good reason. Highly localized articu-
lating decisions such as individual window placement, sill height, glazing properties
and operability further define relative spatial character and a gradient of intimacy. The
different scale and placement of a slender French balcony vs. a balcony that serves
as an outdoor room signals a very different relationship between the private interior
and the public space beyond the façade, coupled with a vastly different range of uses.
Beautiful and harmonious proportions
Leading Italian Renaissance architects including Leon
Battista Alberti, Sebastiano Serlio, Francesco di Giorgio
Martini and Andrea Palladio followed in the footsteps of
Vitruvius, setting down lists of beautiful and harmonious
room proportions. Palladio’s shortlist of harmonious pro-
portions includes the following:
1:1 circle
1:1 square
1:1.333… (3:4) square + 1/3
1:1.414… (1:√2) diagonal of the square
1:1.5 (2:3) square + 1/2
1:1.666 (3:5) square + 2/3
1:2 double square
Most of these ratios correspond to pure intervals in
music. Others are echoed throughout mathematics
and in patterns and geometries of organic growth.
Nonetheless, culture and personal judgment ulti-
mately define good proportion.
The Golden Section or Divina proportione (1.612…,
derived by solving a/b = a+b/a) was avoided by archi-
tects until the 19th century, when Adolf Zeising pub-
lished his research on proportions in nature and art. In
the 20th century, the Golden Section was a foundation
of Ernst Neufert's anthropomorphic studies and of Le
Corbusier's Modulor system of proportions.
As sizes, shapes, placements, spacings, rhythms and
ratios build up, they form three-dimensional proportion
systems. The rules of those systems then set geometrical
relationships between constituent parts and larger wholes.
![Page 87: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
78 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
Specify the material composition of the primary volume
Materials shape façade character and the selection and connection to the base form of
articulating elements. Forms that are fundamentally stereotomic — made of compres-
sive materials such as concrete, stone, and masonry — lend themselves to subtrac-
tive volumetric moves and relatively small and discrete articulating moves. Openings
are often expressed as punched holes in otherwise continuous building surfaces. By
contrast, tectonic assemblies made of wood, steel and truss or space frame structures
work in both compression and tension. Building envelopes built on such structures
may easily insert or attach large or complex configurations.
Incorporate elements with multiple readings and uses
Articulating elements may add richness to design by offering multiple spatial and terri-
torial readings and/or serving multiple purposes. For instance: Add-on elements may
simultaneously serve lower level configurations while completing higher-level struc-
tures; bay window and porch roofs may provide balconies.
BEAR IN MIND
Design simultaneously from large to small and from small to large
Design proceeds in multiple directions simultaneously: To articulate a large initial
volume, a designer adds small parts; assembles room-sized parts, frameworks or part-
whole configurations; and defines space with partitions. The ability to design in each of
those ways is directly tied to the ability to parse the overall composition of the building
in multiple ways. When buildings are perceived as unitary sculptural shapes rather than
as assemblages of component parts, transformation proceeds overwhelmingly from
large to small.
Design simultaneously inward and outward
In focusing on the building envelope, this play emphasizes working from the outside
in while simultaneously anticipating the potential character of interior space and the
opportunities each move creates − or precludes. Design also proceeds simultane-
ously from the inside out. It balances urban space, rooflines, façades, public/private
and interior/exterior relationships and the sequence, quality, experience and capacity
of interior spaces.
In the hierarchy of design and construction, interior design follows architecture. Many
building types accordingly offer comparatively changeable and potentially shorter-
lived interior subdivisions. Subdivision and internal partitioning then remain largely
independent from design of the overall building and façade. By contrast, in non-
thematic design, when form follows function, façade design may become subordinate
to interior subdivisions of space and use driven by program.
![Page 88: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 2.1 − PRIMARY AND SECONDARY MOVES 79
This sample play succinctly illustrates how volumetric and additive moves reshape and
articulate the simple base form.
The first three moves illustrate primary volumetric transformation at the scale of the
overall building volume. They refine and set the shape of the large-scale volume while
respecting its overall integrity. Subsequent moves then introduce smaller architectural
elements to articulate the design. They set up interior/exterior views and embody
intentions regarding inside/outside movement, organization of internal access to vari-
ous parts of the form, spatial sequence and natural lighting and ventilation.
The designer’s evocation of traditional residential architecture neither aids nor detracts
from the overall design performance and its explicit goals: Play 2 is not about style. It is
about a general form-making approach, applying specific design methods and how a
simple series of exterior moves begins to evoke a coherent architecture and suggest
interior distribution of spaces while leaving the form open to many alternate interior
floor plans.
Sample Play 2.1
Primary and secondary moves
BASE FORM A simple box with a gabled roof
M1 Articulated roof form and entry
M2 A bay to the right
M3 Dormer windows on the roof and articulation of a
front porch with front steps
M4 An oriel window on the side bay
M5 Fenestration and a railing for the porch
M1 M2
M3 M4 M5
BASE FORM
![Page 89: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
80 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
Hierarchies of assembly
The relationship between volumetric and articulating moves is hierarchical and asym-
metrical: While secondary articulating moves can be made without compromising
volumetric moves, the reverse may not hold true.
Such hierarchies of physical assembly have a direct effect on architecture: Environ-
mental design routinely starts at the top of the physical hierarchy and works downward.
It is a matter of common sense to avoid needless disruption and rework. For instance:
• First the layout of the street and building lots is finalized. Only then does the design
of individual buildings proceed. Otherwise, a modest change in lot size, street width
or alignment at any point could wipe out pre-existing buildings and designs.
• At the next environmental layer down, buildings, spaces, rooms and wall openings
are laid out prior to detailing interiors and specifying appliances, fixtures, equipment,
furnishings and furniture.
The order of construction parallels the order of design, beginning with site preparation
and subsurface civil engineering.
The benefits of observing the hierarchical order of assembly continue throughout the
useful life of the building: Secondary parts in the hierarchy of assembly, when properly
detailed, can be freely upgraded, reconfigured and/or demolished and replaced at any
time without disturbing primary parts. Different areas of the building and/or different
tenancies can therefore transform independently, without impacting others.
In a simple solo design play in which all form remains plastic, the effects of violating
fundamental hierarchies of assembly are often trivial. However, as design coordinates
increasing numbers of parts, systems and players, the potential consequences of
cascading effects that result from out-of-sequence design quickly multiply.
Special Topic
Assembly of form
![Page 90: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 81
Part–whole assemblies
Almost every architectural configuration can be broken down into a smaller physical hier-
archy of assembly of configurations and parts … which is in turn composed of smaller
configurations and parts. Such part–whole assemblies are, by definition, assemblages
composed of discrete parts that are, in turn, recognizable as complete entities.
Whether design involves traditional building methods and materials or pre-engineered
and pre-configured industrialized systems and kits of parts, configurations are
composed or transformed by combining, disassembling, changing out or reconfig-
uring various component parts. Part–whole assemblies, when recognized, provide
additional choices at a fine-grained level of design. In upgrading a façade wall with
substantial glazing, one might variously: replace existing windows with new units; add
balconies and bay windows; replace recurring windows with a continuous storefront
system; or replace the entire façade with a structural glazing or curtain wall system.
To understand what is possible and how to design in each instance requires breaking
part–whole assemblies down, deconstructing them into component parts and then
reconfiguring them in whole or in part.
Plays 2a and 2b therefore call attention to part–whole assemblies, beginning with
familiar and easily deconstructed configurations that are routinely added to the build-
ing exterior: balconies, porches, sunrooms, bay windows, etc.
2.6 Part–whole assemblies. A configuration can
frequently be read both as a unitary entity and as
an assemblage of constituent parts. Copyrighted
drawing by N. John Habraken
![Page 91: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
82 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
The uses of conceptual deconstruction
Organizing complex form according to the logic of assembly based on physical hier-
archy is only one among many ways in which buildings can be understood. Forms may
otherwise be deconstructed as compositions of different parts and configurations –
spatial sequences, hierarchical or processional spaces, architectural planes, façade
elements, structural pieces, architectural systems, colors, functions, materials, etc. In
time, designers intuitively train their eyes to perceive architectural forms as overlap-
ping series of compositions and to select the most useful breakdown for framing and
fine-tuning design moves in a given situation.
While this may sound abstract, its impact on design is direct: In defining the configura-
tions that compose a building, we set the palette of elements with which we will design.
This also determines where and how we will limit transformation. Understanding the
hierarchy of design is crucial when designing any configuration or assembly of forms.
It precludes out-of-sequence volumetric moves late in the game that would force unin-
tended changes to secondary parts. It also sets up the designer to design and detail
shorter-lived secondary design elements in ways that allow them to be manipulated,
added or subtracted without having the effects of such changes ripple throughout the
more static primary volume.
2.7 Architectural parts and configurations of a
residential façade. San Juan, Puerto Rico
Drawing © 1982 by Andrés Mignucci from Projective
Architecture: Studies Toward the Meaning and
Generative Language of Associative Built Form
~i
SIJIHIUI F.:\TS
SIIII-SfS TEIIS
nf.II E~TS
.~
II~SIC: SfSTE~1 '\'~SE'IIIU:1l Sf STEil
I-~
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
f.II
![Page 92: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 83
Building base, middle and top
Buildings as diverse as skyscrapers, mid-rise buildings and bungalows characteris-
tically divide into three similar vertically stacked zones, comprising two ends and a
middle. Those zones jointly clarify the compositional principles and architectural char-
acter of the building exterior by ordering the placement of architectural elements.
The base zone (ground form) defines public and private territorial zones at street level
and the relationship of the building to the ground plane. It implements the designer’s
chosen strategies regarding connection to the street, entry sequence and incorporat-
ing sectional changes in the ground plane.
The top or roof zone silhouettes the building in figure/ground against the sky, contrib-
utes to the urban skyline and reinforces the identity of the building at the urban scale.
The middle zone serves as the trunk or body of the building. It extends between the two
end forms and can be composed of one or more unique stories or many similar stacked
stories that accommodate similar activities.
Elements of vertical circulation and technical infrastructure will often continuously
span all zones. Windows and doors will recur similarly throughout them. The selec-
tion of architectural elements within each zone otherwise tends to vary: The subset
of elements found in the base zone potentially includes all configurations specifically
associated with exterior transition: entryways, vestibules, arcades, porches, stoops,
verandas and other building extensions, steps, stairs, arcades, bay windows and load-
ing bays. The middle zone may house windows, balconies, galleries, bay windows and
loggias. The top zone may incorporate dormers, skylights, penthouses, equipment and
roof gardens and terraces.
2.8 Building section illustrating three basic vertical
building zones − the base, middle and top zones
TOP
MIDDLE
BASE
TOP
MIDDLE
BASE
![Page 93: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
84 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
Special Topic
Finding the place of the special
within the ordinary
Design is often conceived in a process that is defined by a specific owner, site,
program and designer. Yet the forms we create remain inextricably linked to larger
natural, built, historical and sociocultural landscapes as well. Everyday environments
tend to be highly thematic. Urban fabrics throughout a region often constitute a family
of typologically linked but distinct forms. Local vernacular buildings constitute families
of forms that inhabit a shared landscape and incorporate similar structures, patterns,
forms, materials, systems and series of transformations.
In vernacular and professional architecture alike, certain key dimensions, elements
and sequences of moves repeat rhythmically, propelled by parallel circumstances,
shared cultural references, preferences and common sense. The resulting continuity
of rhythm and proportion, patterns, dimensions, materials and series of parts may span
façades, blocks, neighborhoods or regions.
Thematic design emphasizes awareness of the fundamentally hierarchical and
systematic composition of environmental settings and of the typical repetitive systems,
patterns and elements that frame our environment. It argues that each individual design
move occurs in relation to the broader formal thematic setting within which it occurs.
Tokonomas
The tokonoma is a contemplative shallow display alcove. It
traditionally juxtaposes a special post − one that retains its
natural appearance − against the exquisitely refined sur-
faces, objects and overall composition of its setting.
2.10 Residence of renowned Meiji-era samurai
couple Joseph and Yae Neesima (Niijima)
Kyoto (19th century). Photo © Yoshifusa Mutsumi,
courtesy of hanaartsjapan.com
2.9 Shokintei Pavilion. Katsura Imperial Villa, Kyoto
(17th century). Photo © Peter Lloyd, courtesy of
the photographer, with permission of the Imperial
Household Agency Kyoto Office
![Page 94: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 85
But as we observe characteristic streets, alleys, sidewalks, building lots, entries, balco-
nies, etc., there are inevitable breaks in the pattern. Sooner or later, things out of the
ordinary occur: Geometries and relationships between parts shift. Secondary themes
appear. The placement and/or rhythm of elements is disrupted. Non-thematic build-
ings, squares and streets appear. Non-thematic signature moves instill unique identity
in otherwise generic building façades. Changes in color, material, direction or detailing
punctuate the continuous surface of exterior walls.
Non-thematic elements appear in many ways at each environmental level. Such
breaks in the internal logic and continuity of the design often evidence complex larger
relationships. Building designers otherwise introduce unique profiles, accent bricks
or mortar patterns to relieve the monotony of continuous surfaces; displace, rotate,
reshape or replace individual windows or insert highly ornate balconies in the midst of
static arrays of windows; or design dramatically cantilevered or suspended entrance
canopies or slender vertical supporting elements at provocative skew angles to trans-
form the entries of non-descript buildings and elevate them above the ordinary.
The processes that introduce the unexpected often seem unstructured. As designers,
we know that finding the right spot for idiosyncratic and/or poetic moves and signature
elements, or adjusting their shapes, sizes and locations is a hands-on affair. It is often
driven by a vision and realized by iterative adjustment, guided by eye and by feel. None-
theless, such moves are neither irrational nor beyond formal analysis. Subsequent
scrutiny will generally reveal that they “close the circle” in some way, subtly resolving
unmet needs. Those needs may be purely formal, compositional and geometrical − as
in Le Corbusier’s “place of the right angle.” They may be behavioral − as in landscape
architecture’s reliance on “desire lines” in locating paths. Like clusters of leaves that
exceptionally sprout directly from a tree trunk, signature add-on elements sometimes
leap across the environmental hierarchy, resolving the unresolved design of a higher
level with small-scale moves.
Along the same lines, the placement of axes and of unique doors and windows,
sculptures, shrines or other focal elements may bring a building into alignment with
or respond directly to larger-scale urban and landscape features and forms, cardinal
directions, cosmological, phenomenological, religious and cultural frameworks, etc.
Windows, lanterns, cupolas, rooms, wings or entire buildings rotate to align with cardi-
nal directions, coasts, mountains or other large-scale defining landscape elements
or to frame vast or symbolic views. Feng shui places key building elements based on
conditions that are large-scale and cosmological rather than small-scale and personal.
![Page 95: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
86 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
Special Topic
Creating and analyzing thematic environment
Traditionally, builders have custom composed and constructed each everyday building
of a given type. Victorian-era wood-framed houses in San Francisco were composed
using similar massing moves and kits of articulating parts while following similar rules.
Guided by local examples and by pattern books, carpenters freely combined basic
typological configurations, specific selections of industrially mass-produced building
parts, commonly accepted building systems, construction rules of thumb and design
rules. While each design and color scheme is exuberantly unique, the rows of houses
share unifying thematic qualities.
Decoding such existing urban fabrics into systems, elements, sets of rules and kits
of parts allows a designer to critically analyze local thematic structure and dominant
building types. That analysis provides a foundation for successful design interven-
tion in ways that allow multiple designers − often at different times and on different
environmental levels − to create freely and compatibly while steadily building overall
environmental coherence.
2.11 De Lano House. San Francisco, California (1884)
Photo © 1984 by Michael B. Hofmann, courtesy of
the photographer
2.13 Elevation of Clay Street, San Francisco – The assembled façade as a system of variants
2.12, 2.13 Drawings © 1982 R. Thomas Hille from
Understanding and Transforming What’s There: A Look at
the Formal Rule Structure of the Residential Façade Zone in
Victorian San Francisco, courtesy of the author
2.12 Victorian San Francisco: A set of elementary parts and façade components shown in their
relative positions
![Page 96: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 87
2.14 Two different façades in which the library of elements has been used 2.15 Library of elements arranged in a dimensionally
and architecturally coherent way
Special Topic
Kits of parts
When design guidelines and pre-selected elements are combined, they allow multi-
ple building designers to intervene coherently in fine-grained theme and variation
within urban fabric. This example develops a kit of parts of façade elements and
establishes dimensional and positioning rules. They are then used to design two
thematic façade variations.
When you create only one unit or small building at a time, such methodological
approaches to generating form may seem unnecessary. Architects can even design
a handful of stylistically linked residences, such as the Rue Mallet-Stevens in Paris,
without undue attention to design methods. However, designers now receive commis-
sions to create dozens or hundreds of units at a time. At that point, they must choose a
design method: They may — as became popular after World War II — impose top-down
limits on variation and follow stereotypical programs to create limited selections of
model units that accommodate a pre-established range of needs. Or they may adopt
historical design methods that allow them to quickly and efficiently generate coherent
series of custom designs in theme and variation.
Today, manufacturers and design firms organize digital libraries of stylistically compat-
ible elements with alternative details for different conditions. The availability of easily
customized pre-selected groupings of parametric objects promotes the thematic
design of inherently coherent series of projects. The use of kits of parts and architec-
tural libraries also streamlines internal design coordination.
2.14, 2.15 Transformation sequence of façade elements.
Copyrighted drawings by R. Thomas Hille from The
Grunsfeld Variations: A report on the thematic development
of an urban tissue by John Habraken et al., courtesy of R.
Thomas Hille
-1M!:r-;·
.11- .t1
~. ~
~=1 ill
':2
.,.,n
41 H'fi2
~ij
·f l r
1- ..•" .
.~
"
';;-:1"
H'fi2
41 H'fi2H'fi2
H'fi2H'fi2H'fi2
H'fi2
H'fi2H'fi2H'fi2H'fi2
H'fi2
H'fi2
H'fi2
H'fi2H'fi2 H'fi2 H'fi2
H'fi2H'fi2H'fi2H'fi2
H'fi2H'fi2H'fi2 H'fi2
H'fi2
![Page 97: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
88 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
Play 2a emphasized small-scale additive volumetric transformation of the base form
followed by articulation of the exterior. In Play 2b, the focus during initial volumetric
transformation is specifically on modifying the initial base volume in a quick succes-
sion of subtractive primary moves: carving the building mass. Volumetric transforma-
tion is once again followed by articulation.
Play 2b begins with a simple extruded orthogonal solid with a flat roof as a base
form. This epitomizes an initial building form and approach that is common throughout
the equatorial latitudes. Carving the base form creates habitable territories such as
terraces and overhangs that result in additional spatial definition and sheltered space
below.
This play encourages strong horizontal planes and overhangs. It provides opportuni-
ties for habitable roof terraces, penthouse structures, etc. that shape the top zone of
the building. The new base form requires a new and different selection of secondary
elements appropriate to its form language.
RULES OF PLAY
Follow the rules stated in Play 2a.
Play 2b
Articulating Exterior Building Form −
Transforming a Cube
30°(
10m
)
10m
)10
m)
10m
)
10m
)10
m)
10m
)10
m)
![Page 98: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 89
BEAR IN MIND
Continue to observe hierarchy of assembly
Volumetric moves remain hierarchically superior to articulating moves. First modify
the overall base volume in a series of subtractive moves. Then introduce smaller-scale
elements to articulate the resulting building volume.
Compare and contrast performances of Plays 2a and 2b
The contrasts between plays using base forms 2a and 2b demonstrate how a given
methodological approach can serve varied architectures with fundamentally different
associations. After judging individual moves and overall performance on their own
merits, carefully compare and contrast performances of both plays:
• What kinds of spaces do additive or subtractive types of moves specifically generate?
• How do rules of proportion play into each design method?
• In each method, how does the character of the vertical zones – base, middle, top – differ?
2.16 Schröder House. Utrecht, Netherlands (1924)
Gerrit Rietveld, Architect. Copyrighted photo by
Jonathan Teicher
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 99: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
90 ARTICULATING EXTERIOR BUILDING FORM
In surveying building exteriors in coherent settings, it becomes readily apparent that
every culture and/or region favors particular vocabularies of articulating moves and
families of basic building forms. The specific selections of parts and implicit placement
rules then vary over time and from place to place.
At the conclusion of Play 2, it is useful to return to direct real world observation of two-
step processes of building design − processes that follow volumetric transformation
with local articulation − as well as one-step (articulation-only) processes. This closing
exercise is intended to further structure your observational approach and hone your
ability to document real world examples of discrete exterior elements. The goal is not
to assemble a catalog or library of observed parts and configurations for the purpose
of appropriating them directly into your own design. It is rather to strengthen the direct
links between observing form, projecting form and shaping additive elements and
volumetric moves compatible with your own design sensibility.
Structured Observation
Exterior add-on building elements
![Page 100: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 91
The challenge
Observe and record building elements that recur throughout a given built field. Focus
both on commonalities and on non-thematic one-off variations. When you encounter
the latter, observe where in the building form anomalies occur. If possible, ascertain
why they occur and the extent to which they respond to site, functional, aesthetic,
social, ritual or other factors.
Select where to initially observe
Observe and record recurring elements in a formally coherent neighborhood that is
nearby. Its buildings should offer in theme and variation a rich diversity of exterior
add-on architectural elements and zones of transition: e.g., doors, windows, store-
fronts, entries, vestibules, porches, bay windows, stoops, verandas, arcades, balconies,
bay or oriel windows, loggias, dormers, skylights, roof terraces, etc.
Record your observations
Record your observations in a sketchbook, notebook and/or annotated digital collection.
Use field observation to enlarge your kit of parts
Share and expand your library of design elements, freely incorporating parts from
other designers and places.
Break it down
Use this structured observation as an opportunity to train your eye to break down
the environmental forms you observe into various compositions of parts in ways that
directly influence design. When focusing on part–whole configurations, break them
down further into smaller architectural elements. Whether you analyze alternative
readings of a typological framework, an entire building or a façade, try to observe and
record the rules by which parts relate to one other, to the whole of the larger configura-
tion and to the urban fabric.
Follow with synthesis
To complete the observation and apply it directly to hands-on design, create a new kit
of parts that translates what you have observed into a more personal design idiom.
Wherever possible, design those parts based on locally fabricated available materials.
Questions to ask
What larger rhythms or patterns begin to emerge
throughout the form or series of forms?
Do elements recur in specific horizontal or vertical zones
or in specific relation to other building parts?
What elements appear to recur because of factors other
than function?
What specific characteristics seem to hold constant from
element to element across a number of buildings?
What characteristics and elements appear to be set as
defining parts of the basic typological theme?
What aspects of design do building designers freely
establish or change?
Can you identify small add-on elements that relate
directly to forms on a higher environmental level?
![Page 101: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
92
3.1 Section model. Photo by Seier+Seier,
licensed under Creative Commons 2.0 and
with permission of Kim Utzon
Physical models provide continuous direct views
in every direction throughout the designer’s field
of vision. Longitudinal sketch section models cut
through the building to provide simultaneous views
and opportunities to refine the design and flow of
space in all directions, particularly from front to
back and from the ground to the uppermost roof
level. In row buildings with blind party walls on deep
lots, the form of the roof offers a major opportunity
to introduce natural light and ventilation. Jørn
Utzon's longitudinal section model of the Melli
Bank highlights the architect's use of arrays of roof
lanterns that span the space between parallel
walls as a means to compose the shape, pattern,
texture and rhythm of the natural light drawn
into the building's central dominant space. It is an
early thematic precedent to his masterwork – the
Bagsværd Church (1976).
Melli Bank, Tehran (1962). Jørn Utzon, Architect
![Page 102: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
93
Start with a room-sized space.
It is bounded by blind walls on two sides and faces a street on a third side.
Working in longitudinal section, transform it in a sequence of moves to create a row
house bathed in natural light.
Design in section.
Indicate construction,
volumetric space and use of natural light.
Draw in two dimensions.
Think in three dimensions.
Designing in Longitudinal Section3
![Page 103: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
94 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
This play explores longitudinal section as a primary form-making tool. Players begin
to explore the relationship between structure, space and hands-on manipulation of
form through preliminary design of a row house in longitudinal section. The focus is
on developing the ability to visualize and walk through a building in the mind’s eye,
experiencing its architectural qualities and shaping certain basic approaches, patterns
and qualities. It highlights in particular basic strategies and techniques for introducing
natural light in ways that reinforce the overall architecture.
Introduction
3.3 Interior material strategies. Thin Flats,
Philadelphia. Onion Flats, Architects. The
combination of skylights and other roof
opening configurations together with
material strategies such as translucent floors,
transparent openings in interior walls and
open grating stair steps helps natural light to
penetrate down to lower floors. Copyrighted
photo by Timothy McDonald, courtesy of
the architect
3.2 Mediated natural light as generator of form
Violeta 150, San Juan, Puerto Rico. Andrés Mignucci
and Maribel Ortiz, Architects. Copyrighted photo by
Andrés Mignucci
![Page 104: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 95
Why design in section?
Building sections can convey a great deal of fundamental architectural information
subtly and quickly. However, they are often underutilized, relegated to the tail end
of design to convey efficiently technical information regarding construction, energy
conservation strategies, waterproofing, etc. In short, they are often used to portray
information that is technical − rather than architectural − in nature.
Each building section or section elevation represents only one particular slice through
a building. Nonetheless, during each design phase, design sections have the potential
to develop crucial information regarding the fundamental relationship between inside
and outside, spatial organization and character, proportion and structure as well as
natural illumination and ventilation. Design sections − like plan and elevation projec-
tions − also correctly represent dimensions, angles and proportions.
It is hard to draw a longitudinal section at any scale without exploring how a building is
put together in ways that incorporate all of these design characteristics. The longitudi-
nal section is arguably the two-dimensional projection that offers the greatest insight
into the overall spatial experience, configuration and progression of three-dimensional
form. Because of the breadth of information it provides, the longitudinal section readily
becomes a key orthographic projection for visualizing architecture.
3.4 Carving into the roof to bring in light from above
Apartment Building, Athens, De.Ar Architects.
Copyrighted photo courtesy of the architect
![Page 105: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
96 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Why a row house?
Multi-story row houses (sometimes known as townhouses, townhomes or terrace
housing) are ubiquitous. Although the term often suggests the blocks of medium
density housing that became increasingly popular from the 18th century on, multi-
story row houses were already common throughout Egyptian cities such as Thebes
(3rd millennium bc). They have continued to appear under an assortment of names
throughout many different cultures and eras in a vast variety of typological forms.
Beyond minor variation when accommodating vertical circulation, structure is entirely
conventional in row houses. The basic structural diagram of the row house built
between party walls is simple: Beams easily span the cross-width of the site between
bearing walls, with intermediate posts and beams or internal spine walls added as
needed. The essence of almost any row house − its construction, spatial organiza-
tion and character − can be conveyed substantially in a single strategically selected
longitudinal section.
Bounded to a great extent by existing conventions of street frontage and structure and
by blind side walls, row house design focuses to a great extent on internal organization.
Its design is universally defined by several significant creative challenges:
3.5 Section of a typical 18th century courtyard row house with multiple interior patios. Casa Tavárez,
San Juan, Puerto Rico. Copyrighted drawing by Fernando Abruña & Alberto del Toro, Architects,
courtesy of Fernando Abruña
Served, dominant and servant space
Row houses − like most building types − feature a hier-
archy of three distinct kinds of space (adapted from the
famous distinction drawn by Louis Kahn):
Served space refers to space with the built-in capac-
ity to accommodate a range of basic activities. Series of
such spaces set the scale, rhythm and primary structure
of the building as a whole.
Served spaces tend to be arranged around one or more
dominant spaces: particularly important served spaces
that come in a wide variety of forms. Dominant spaces
− from large central sky lit halls to more modest inward-
looking spaces − are often conspicuously large, tall and/
or ornate, with special detailing. Their placement anchors
and stabilizes the building’s organization as a whole.
Servant spaces accommodate a wide range of func-
tions in support of the served spaces of the building. They
provide utilitarian support and tend to be placed inward
toward the dark core and/or the rear of the building.
![Page 106: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 97
The first is introducing natural light into the center of the building and its lower floors.
The second has to do with the internal arrangement of varied room sizes within a largely
fixed volume. Balancing and arranging dominant, served and servant spaces within that
enclosed form often poses a significant three-dimensional logistical puzzle.
The third challenge is thematic and inherently social: In every cultural setting where
row houses are common, what row houses look like, how they are organized, dimen-
sioned and used is commonly understood. By definition, they also tend to be surrounded
by typologically similar buildings. The question is how best to therefore intervene as a
designer.
One of the most important aspects of any given building type is the flow of people and
functions within. The characteristically narrow width of the row house makes the spatial
sequence that accommodates that flow even more important.
The longitudinal section is singularly useful for providing a systemic overview of repeti-
tive strategies for capturing and utilizing daylight. When drawn appropriately, it clearly
illustrates the light-inflected character of progression through space: how repetitive
forms capture daylight and shape its character and rhythm; how daylight reinforces the
architecture and interior character of space and its use; how light draws building users
through space, brings them to a halt, encourages them to turn toward transitional
spaces, etc.
All of these factors make the row house an ideal laboratory for exploring sectional trans-
formation in a way that links directly to observable real world conditions and precedents.
Semi-autonomous design of the
façade and zone of transition
Row house building frontage often incorporates typo-
logical patterns related to the design and symmetry of
the façade, its relationship to the public realm and use of
street frontage. Such characteristics are likely to recur
regardless of how a particular row house and its site are
used. For instance:
• Many historic Taiwanese vernacular fabrics feature
modest single-story frontage row houses protected by
low roofs that slope toward the street, in anticipation
of storefronts. (The stores themselves may or may not
follow.) A much larger building frequently arises toward
the rear of the lot, separated from the initial row house
by a courtyard.
• Stone stoops in historic Amsterdam canal houses and
Manhattan brownstones, Georgian London areas entered
via individual wrought iron bridges and brick English
basement entryways in Washington, D.C. similarly fea-
ture first floor heights about 3 – 6' (0.9 –1.8m) above
grade. In each building type, the main floor is similarly
lifted up to provide direct access on two levels at the
front entry. The excavated lower level is just high
enough to place windows above grade within low-ceil-
inged habitable space. To a certain extent, such typo-
logical features, together with various other cultural fac-
tors regarding the public aspect of the building and its
zone of transition, determine the character of the façade
independently from its interior architecture and layout.
Despite such commonalities, the character, dimension
and function of the public/private zone of transition
remains distinct from one building type to the next, in ways
that create very different organization of space within the
buildings. In all cases, row house layout is also greatly
affected − among other contributing factors − by vertical
circulation: where it is placed, how it is configured and how
it relates to the rest of the building organization.
![Page 107: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
98 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
RULES OF PLAY
Base form
The base form presents a small initial space located toward the front of a row house
lot. The building faces a street and may extend both upward and backward toward the
rear of the lot. The row house presumably spans between two unseen parallel party
walls, as is typical. A small set of exterior steps at the front suggests the presence of
a comparatively public space. However, the location of any transition from public to
private is unspecified.
Dimensions
The building volume should fit within a prescribed building envelope that is in keeping
with vernacular row house types: Maintain a spanning distance of 16'–24' (6m–7.5m)
between the walls and limit the height of the building to 3–5 stories. Within those
parameters, neither the length of the two blind party walls nor the width of the lot is
specified: Those dimensions can adjust to accommodate your design.
Natural light
As a rule, dominant and served spaces require natural light.
Location, climate and orientation
Specify a particular geographical location, climate and compass orientation for your
base form. For the purposes of diagrammatic natural lighting design, it is important
to form a general three-dimensional mental model of seasonal solar paths and sun
angles. It is not necessary to model the building digitally or to render it in order to
pinpoint sun angles at different times of day throughout the year. Studying interior
photos, paintings and sketches and then depicting lighting hands-on in comparable
ways in your own sections is an excellent way to get an intuitive feel for the complex
ways in which light and shadow spread through rooms and across interior floor, wall
and ceiling surfaces.
Play 3
Design In Longitudinal Section
or Between Two Walls
12'
(3.6
5m)
DIR
EC
TIO
NO
FG
RO
WT
H36
'(11
m)
max
.
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m) .6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m) .6
5m)
.65m
) .65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
)
.65m
)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
)
.65m
).6
5m)
.65m
)
![Page 108: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
PLAY 3 − BETWEEN TWO WALLS 99
Development of the section
Design and document a move-by-move transformation sequence. It should depict a
well-developed and harmonious arrangement of dominant, served and servant spaces
in a variety of sizes. Freely incorporate skylights and light wells, step the roof and/or
modify the ground plane. Introduce courtyards sparingly.
Open-ended function
Allow the sizes, positions and relationships of spaces to suggest a range of possi-
ble uses. Do not specify particular uses for individual spaces or tailor rooms to meet
detailed programmatic requirements for specific uses.
Zones of transition
Your section should define public/private and interior/exterior zones of transition.
Number of moves
It is difficult to impose an absolute limit on the total number of moves for Play 3. Partic-
ularly during your initial performance, try to cap play at about 10 moves.
Solving the right puzzle
Confront the spatial challenge of this three-dimensional puzzle head-on. Create bold
floor level changes and variations in ceiling height to clearly and effectively articulate
your design intent, rather than oversimplifying the three-dimensional puzzle or using
procedural cunning to sidestep it. Do not: rigidly standardize room heights; randomly
assign interstitial mechanical space or other “dead” space to absorb differences and
standardize floor-to-floor heights; cluster rooms of similar size regardless of spatial
sequence; or base the heights of rooms on ease of stacking rather than on architec-
tural and experiential quality.
Final product
The final presentation sequence should stand alone as a design performance. None-
theless, feel free to clarify or further articulate it using additional plans, sections,
perspective, axonometric or other sketches or diagrams.
Media
Maintaining accurate scale and dimensions throughout this play is essential. Drawing
freehand to scale on tracing paper, vellum or other note-book-sized sheets allows
easy tracing of each preceding stage and is the quickest way to produce a section
transformation series.
Using a simple 2D drafting program is another alternative: To maintain image scale
and registration, first draw the base form on a background layer. Place each subse-
quent move on a new layer (or, in some design software, on a new “story”).
![Page 109: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
100 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
STRATEGIES
Directional sequence of moves
We recommend building progressively upward and rearward from the small initial space,
particularly the first time through this play.
Driving play with natural light
In designing between two extended blind walls, there is inherent tension between
the impulse to maximize the availability of useful activity space and surfaces and the
desire to reserve designated floor, wall and ceiling areas for components of a natural
lighting system. Successful play often requires a broad and innovative repertoire of
strategies for introducing natural light of varied character throughout the deep and
narrow building volume.
Balancing acts
Assembling rooms of varied shapes, sizes and purposes in 3D requires balanced equi-
librium between dominant, normal and servant space. Coherent overall architectural
order and structure must harmonize with the need for specific dimensions, proportions
and qualities of natural lighting for individual spaces. In dialogue between form and
requirements, dominant space often serves as an organizational focal point.
Higher and lower spaces
Changes in floor levels and ceiling heights often signal hierarchical differences
between spaces. In general:
• High-ceilinged habitable spaces are more important than low-ceilinged habit-
able spaces.
• Spaces on upper floors accommodate uses that are more private than those on
lower levels.
• Similarly, within space that has an internal level change, the raised area is more
private − in terms of restricted access − than the lower level. A three- or four-step
level change is sufficient to distinguish such spaces.
When unsure of what precise dimension to use, explore experiential character in quick
diagrammatic sections, raising or lowering selected planes in 2' (60cm) increments.
Zones of transition and the form of the building exterior
Row houses are typically bounded by blind walls on two sides and ground below. The
remaining three sides − the front and rear façades and roof − develop zones of tran-
sition between the building and surrounding open space. Build upon the skills and
repertoire of moves previously developed in Plays 1 and 2 to articulate the zones of
transition and the exterior building form in those three areas.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 110: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 101
Sketches and notes
Because section drawings are so very information-rich, working out the sequence of
moves will initially require supplemental notes, partial sketch plans, elevations, façades,
cross-sections, axonometric and perspective sketches and/or models. When drawing in
a sketchbook, it is easiest to create supplemental notes and sketches in the margins as
you design, providing one comprehensive page per move. However, producing sketches
and notes in a separate notebook, on loose leafs of paper, on separate “process” layers
in digital drawings or even in series of annotated sketch models will also work.
BEAR IN MIND
Section as a tool for thinking and designing
Construction documents are intended to systematically record comprehensive techni-
cal and legal construction information. By contrast, early schematic drawings, sketches
and models serve a very different purpose: In setting down a design-driven impression
of the whole, they offer an opportunity for hands-on spatial cognition that helps to clarify
ongoing design directions.
One key to successful early schematic design is finding methods of quickly and effort-
lessly externalizing internal dialogue with form. Freehand sketching of plans, sections,
details or elevations can be a particularly powerful representational tool. Gestural impre-
cision is no limitation − as long as you bear accurate dimensions in mind. In focusing on
section as a design tool, try to limit the use of quick sketches in plan, perspective or other
projections as much as possible.
Visualizing space in 3D
With every move in Play 3, take the time to step back and mentally visualize the emerging
form. Envision its procession of spaces, proportions, character of light and space. Adjust
as necessary prior to proceeding to the next move. Repeatedly visualizing design − both
in your mind’s eye and in evocative sketch representation − renders the ability to create
quick secondary sketches to explain and clarify design second nature.
Designing open-ended space with a great deal of architectural specificity
and character
Animals tend to possess innate ability to assess the intrinsic qualities, capacities and
appropriateness of spaces and to settle into them accordingly. Human beings are no
exception. For millennia, dominant, served and servant spaces have been created,
used and implicitly understood by cultures throughout the world. Not surprisingly, when
contemporary end-users are given the opportunity to participate in decision-making
about how to use space − whether for a dwelling, a production space or a schoolroom −
they quickly, straightforwardly, expertly and ingeniously make decisions about what goes
where; distribute activities − often in unexpected ways; and inhabit space. Subsequently,
they continue to refine their space and how they use it.
![Page 111: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
102 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
During the last century, as architects have increasingly assumed the design of large
segments of the everyday built environment on behalf of institutional and corporate
clients, they have gradually abandoned precedent in favor of top-down design based
on detailed preprogramming. Such quantitative programs base design on stereotypical
average functional needs, sizes and activities for each process and individual function.
Clearly the design, use and subsequent evolution of typological buildings with places
that invite particular inhabitation and accommodate associated activities is profoundly
different from the preemptive assignment of space to specific quantified functions,
within a building shaped to embody a flow and adjacency diagram.
In thematic environments, the characteristics of a given space will often make it an
obvious and ideal location for a specific activity. However, as observation of real world
human inhabitation endlessly confirms, the range of cultural and individual prefer-
ences for using space remains extraordinarily broad and dynamic. For instance, even
the most fundamental activities such as cooking, dining and sleeping can and do in
different times, places and cultural settings occur equally well in any of the three basic
categories of space.
Mediating sun, rain and other geoclimatic conditions
Ceiling openings that bathe interior space in natural light and ventilation generally
require secondary structures to mediate harsh direct sunlight and weather.
Having situated your building with respect to general compass orientation, geographi-
cal location and climate, explore specific ways in which those factors impact building
form. For example: In temperate climates, strategically located direct sunlight is often
highly desirable. In warmer tropical or desert climates, it is to be avoided: Indirect or
filtered light becomes the rule.
This play focuses specifically on the initial introduction of natural light. Nonetheless, it
is worth observing that in colder climates, creating small open air courtyards and light
wells triggers secondary design of water collection and drainage systems and of fully
water-protected and insulated perimeter walls. Roofing over atrium space can generate
other secondary detailing and maintenance issues.
Consider:
• how size, location and formal articulation contribute to each dominant space.
• the design and articulation of skylights, monitors and clerestory windows that intro-
duce light from above and how the wall section and material affect the quality and
spread of light.
• the differing spatial qualities that result from naturally illuminating dominant spaces
with atrium daylighting from directly above, high clerestory light and side lighting
from windows or adjacent spaces.
![Page 112: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 3.1 − FOLLOWING LIGHT 103
When freehand sketches are digitally redrawn for publication, the depiction may lose
spontaneity, subtly rendered shading, handwritten notes and additional detail sketches.
Christina Gryboyianni’s original freehand sketches for the first and final moves show
the richness of the designer’s informal transformation sequence presentation. Draw-
ings for Thematic Design Course at MIT © 1985 by Christina Gryboyianni, courtesy
of the architect
Sample Play 3.1
Designing in longitudinal section
or Following Light
'''TRODlJeTlotJ Of'OO~
P:)~ U6>iT- AlIl/
STAGE. 17.
dz, ,
TIlU.NIoFc:lUU.T1Qt1 'A"',lUllA....S,1Ofol oc:=
112 .2.
b c
iUAr.N~Tll>UTf"f
OZ:"'fJJf~ a;.T"'~
~ItATiOoI
. 1.........
STAGE 2. .
'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ
'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ'''TRODlJeTlotJ
STAGE.
STAGE.STAGE.STAGE.
STAGESTAGE
STAGE STAGE
112112 .2. 112 .2. 112 .2.
112 .2. 112 .2. 112 .2.
dz, ,
dz, ,dz, ,
dz, ,
dz, ,dz, ,
![Page 113: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
104 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
In this transformation sequence, a building
volume grows by step-wise accretion, driven by
the search for natural light. Arrows foreshadow
where each subsequent addition will occur.
Stars indicate a sectional change to allow light
to penetrate the form. Copyrighted drawings by
N. John Habraken adapted from original trans-
formation exercise by Christina Gryboyianni.
Sample Play 3.1
Designing in longitudinal section
or Following Light
M1 A portico to the right
M6 A floor slab opening allows light to
penetrate down to the ground floor.
M11 The terrace is covered by a pergola.
A level change on the ground floor is
created.
M2 A portico to the left
M7 The bay to the right is expanded.
M12 A basement is excavated.
BASE FORM A simple room
![Page 114: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 3.1 − FOLLOWING LIGHT 105
M3 A second story with a terrace
M8 The roof is lifted to create double-story
space with clerestory lighting.
M13 An exterior basement stair is added.
M4 The terrace is roofed over. The corridor
is dark.
M9 A level change on the second story
M14 The floor slab is cut to allow light to filter
down to the basement.
M5 A skylight is opened to illuminate the
second story corridor.
M10 An extension to the right creates another
terrace.
M15 Final configuration
![Page 115: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
106 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
The search for natural light drives form development in this sample play. The designer
has taken on a considerable challenge: Instead of introducing courtyards or light wells,
she maintains a large and unbroken volume while ensuring that daylight enters most
of the enclosed spaces. Many moves are paired: When one move temporarily compro-
mises natural light, the subsequent move adjusts the form to restore it. This strategy
gives the overall design performance unique logic, energy and rhythm.
Dominant spaces tend to be large, as a rule. Here, however, the designer’s decision
to grow the form by aggregating room-sized spaces and parts of spaces establishes
a fairly constant range of room sizes throughout served spaces. The one obviously
dominant space maintains relatively modest dimensions. Nonetheless, its combina-
tion of central location and unique features − steps leading down into the room, a
slightly raised ceiling and columns at the periphery − signals the core importance of
the space, while further highlighting the modesty of the basic spatial module and its
traces within larger spaces. (See, for instance, the dominant space on the second level
in M8 and M9.) The room-sized module that sets the scale and character of the whole
hints at a primary building system with limited spanning capacity. The limited span
appears to accommodate the length or width of a modest room plus a narrow corridor
or support space.
Both the module and the scale reflect deliberate choices made by this particular
designer: They are not inherent in the play. They also do not prevent the designer
from occasionally giving relatively narrow spaces extra height or stretching them
horizontally.
Large non-thematic projects often rely on the same local systems, talent and materials
used to create everyday thematic construction. In such cases, there is nothing unusual
about building large or even monumental buildings using a modest bay size range that
coincides with everyday served space.
It should be noted that the transition from public to private space is ambiguous. The
portico created on the left-hand side (M2) seems to lead to exterior public space and
its creation presumably shifts the territorial boundary. However, no marker indicates
the transition from public to private.
A final word of caution about finding an appropriate level of development:
This sample play resulted from exceptionally rich, consistent, meaningful, sustained
and obsessive design activity: It painstakingly presented 18 moves together with copi-
ous details and notes. That sheer extent of focused effort produced extraordinary
results … but it is hardly recommended as a standard for all players. Play until you
reach a good stopping point: There is no final design product in thematic design: There
is always something further to explore …
![Page 116: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 107
In 1959, Frank Lloyd Wright dramatically broke the steady typological rhythm of
façades, entry canopies and window and belt courses (stringcourses, band courses)
along Manhattan’s dense and elegant residential 5th Avenue apartment build-
ing neighborhood to insert his celebrated Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum. Two
decades later, Renzo Piano and Richard Rogers together with Gianfranco Franchini
would insert their own starkly different, bold and highly idiosyncratic Centre Georges
Pompidou (1977) into the strongly coherent ancient fabric of the Beaubourg neigh-
borhood in Paris.
In these and countless other scenarios, designers have inserted unique highly sculp-
tural non-thematic sculptural form against a strongly thematic backdrop within a pre-
existing environmental context defined by variants of a prevailing building type. The
strong coherence of the surrounding field coupled with the singular nature of their
freestanding intervention offered each of architect a perfect opportunity to reinvent
the look, feel, flow, dimensions, systems and spatial organization of one solitary sculp-
tural form. Both the Guggenheim and Pompidou museums were highly controversial
when they first appeared. In both cases, the public eventually embraced them.
In the 21st century, the setting and the design challenge have changed: Unselfcon-
sciously coherent and fine-grained urban environment historically incorporated shared
values, building fabrics, local building cultures, systems and preferences. Over time,
that coherent built environment has eroded, making way for building that is organized
and executed at a very different scale, with markedly different styles, ways of building
and preconceptions. Three-quarters of a century after post-World War II reconstruc-
tion, pre-war typological building is no longer the default mode or armature of everyday
environment. Coherent urban fabric is unlikely to result from any process in which
countless designers − no matter how talented − set about independently reinventing
urban form and its uses.
Special Topic
Balancing invention and continuity
![Page 117: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
108 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Row house design differs from the design of unique specialized use non-thematic
buildings because its setting inherently demands balance between reinvention and
thematic continuity. Among the questions that it poses are the following: To what
extent and under what conditions should row house design:
• express form within the common typological framework, incorporating elements and
characteristics visible in surrounding row houses?
• reinforce coherence in the public realm, particularly with respect to massing and
façades that are very visible to the public?
• follow personal formal and stylistic preferences and interests, versus well-established
typological precedent?
In that context, it should be noted that in very different ways and at vastly differing
scales, the celebrated housing examples that immediately follow have chosen to
fundamentally reinvent the long, narrow housing unit between two walls. Tadao Ando,
Atelier 5 and Le Corbusier each ingeniously solve a very different problem.
![Page 118: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 109
Tadao Ando’s early Azuma House is minimalist and austere. This small two-story
three-part structure set on a 10' (3.0m) wide lot epitomizes the use of an open central
courtyard to introduce direct and indirect daylight and ventilation into the core of what
would normally be the dark center of a row house. The exterior stair and elevated walk-
way in the central courtyard link all spaces of the front and rear pavilions.
Special Topic
Row house design in longitudinal section
Azuma House, Osaka (1976) Tadao Ando, Architect
3.6 Axonometric, longitudinal section and floor plans
Drawings © 2013 Andrés Mignucci, based on drawing
by the architect
![Page 119: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
110 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
By definition, row houses exist in aggregate series in which topography is often a primary
determinant of the building section.
Here, the natural slope of the site sets up series of stepped south-facing terraces that
create unit entries at multiple levels. The longitudinal section of each long and slender
grouping of three-story residential buildings is further shaped by key strategies regard-
ing organizing access to and throughout the units; bringing in abundant natural light and
ventilation; and ensuring privacy within high-density suburban environment. The basic
section is arrayed across the site with occasional minor offsets or local adjustments.
Green roofs follow the natural slope and echo the broader landscape as they step down
the hillside, opening balconies, trellises, terraces and small walled gardens to the south.
Special Topic
Row house design in longitudinal section
Siedlung Halen, Bern, Switzerland (1961) Atelier 5, Architects
All drawings © Atelier 5, courtesy of the architect
3.8 Site plan3.7 Aerial photo © 2005 Croci & Du Fresne, courtesy
of the architect
![Page 120: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 111
3.11 Model Unit Type 12 is 16'-5" (5m) wide × 45'-11"
(14m) deep and uses a longitudinal internal stair.
3.9 Section
3.10 Model Unit Type 380 is 13'-1" (4m) wide × 45'-11"
(14m) deep with a transverse internal stair.
![Page 121: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
112 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Le Corbusier’s Unité d’Habitation has an overall cross-section of about 80' (24m). As
a result of the complementary shapes of each combined pair of stacked units, they
form a three-story module which interlocks around the central spine of the corridor.
The dwellings extend between blind party walls spaced 12' (3.7m) apart.
The architect appropriates a signature move that had become a mainstay of early
20th-century artists’ housing: Every unit features a dominant 16' (4.8m) double-height
living space whose full-height glazing opens visually to the outdoors and introduces
natural light deep into the space. Instead of utilizing traditional double-loaded corri-
dors, units are accessed via corridors that traverse the dark core at the center of each
3-story module. Upon entering the dwelling, one is naturally drawn forward toward the
expansive openness and light of the 2-story living space. Servant spaces are placed
along the dark corridors.
Special Topic
Row house design in longitudinal section
Unité d’Habitation, Marseille (1952) Le Corbusier, Architect
3.12 Interlocking section. Drawing © 2013 Andrés
Mignucci, based on drawing by the architect
![Page 122: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 113
Previously, we introduced bringing light into the row house and the related uses of the
longitudinal section in a preliminary, exploratory and general way.
In addition to light’s fundamental functional necessity and contribution to the look and
feel of space, it serves to reinforce the character of form, whether strongly directional
or static and inwardly focused. Refining the shape, intensity, directionality and other
qualities of light is achieved through study in section and three-dimensional modeling.
To be understood, light catching roof configurations and other forms require study and
design in both longitudinal and cross-section. The uses of those sections is somewhat
different:
Light studies in cross-section explore qualities of light at a particular moment and
place within the form. Longitudinal sections such as those at the core of Chapter 3
provide an overview of the light catching strategies and their function, how they help to
unify and organize the experience of the larger form and reinforce its patterns, rhythms
and uses.
In particular, light reinforces the directional character of space. Humans, like count-
less other living beings, are heliotropic: They naturally turn toward and follow light.
Light, once captured, mediated and directed through the form and onto its surfaces,
therefore serves as a primary device for leading or drawing people from place to place,
reinforcing rhythms and also helping to signal and build important form events, as
when form branches, begins to build a secondary direction or shifts direction entirely.
Special Topic
Using light as a principal organizer
of directional form
In the Kimbell Museum, continuous light monitors run the
length of each concrete roof shell. While the curved ceiling
is bathed in continuous reflected light, the punctuated
rhythm of the suspended reflectors reinforces the linearity
and primary direction of the galleries. Throughout the
project, Louis Kahn designs natural and artificial light
between the structurally independent spanning shells and
sidewalls in a variety of ways. The architect builds an arch
of directional light at the end of each bay to draw visitors
through the linear gallery.
3.13 North galleries. Kimbell Art Museum, Fort Worth,
Texas (1972). Louis I. Kahn, Architect. Photo by
Robert LaPrelle © 2014 Kimbell Art Museum,
courtesy of the Kimbell
![Page 123: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
114 DESIGNING IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Having explored row houses and their design in cross-section, it is useful to cycle back
and reexamine a familiar local row house type. Wherever possible, use measuring
tapes and lasers, basic body dimensions such as your height and the length of your
stride and arm-span and other approximation techniques such as counting bricks and
ceiling tiles and guesstimating the dimensions of receding objects in perspective to
measure the buildings and spaces you observe.
Survey a number of typologically related examples. Augment direct observation of
building exteriors by entering the buildings, directly observing interiors and consulting
available documentation, where possible.
Vertical circulation
Is the vertical circulation toward the front, center or rear? Do the stairs run parallel or
perpendicular to the blind walls or do they wind upward? Do they play a significant role
in creating, articulating and reinforcing spatial character? Do they serve as major spatial
forms or sculptural elements or are they fundamentally utilitarian? If multiple ways up
and down are provided, what distinguishes their use?
Natural light
What is the overall character and pattern of interior day lighting? How does it vary in
different zones of the house and with respect to solar orientation? How is light intro-
duced to the dark center of the building?
Recurring patterns
Look for typical ways in which similar buildings address recurring conditions. Do row
houses with similar bay widths show similar strategies regarding circulation patterns, how
and where natural light is introduced and the layout of spaces and corresponding uses?
Structured Observation
Analyzing row houses
![Page 124: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 115
No building or type is perfect
Try to identify the merits and constraints, the trade-offs and potential or missed
opportunities embodied in the specific row houses you are observing. Above all,
what characteristics do various instances of the type share in common? What building
features are unique?
Dimensions
Successful building types accommodate wide ranges of use by combining appropri-
ate dimensioning with time-tested internal organization and strategic juxtaposition of
spatial and architectural characteristics. There are vast differences of potential use
between a row house that is 17' (5.2m) wide and one that is 22' (6.7m) wide, just as
there are vast architectural and use differences associated with a 3' (1m) wide stair vs.
a 4' or 6' (1.2m or 1.8m) stair; a room that is 11' vs. 14' (3.4m vs. 4.3m) wide; or a ceiling
height of 12' versus 15' (3.7m vs. 4.6m).
Documentation
As always, gather your observations into notebook or other useful format. Try to coor-
dinate and structure your observation in advance to create opportunities for sharing
and building larger libraries of typological knowledge.
![Page 125: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
116
Lovell Beach House. Newport Beach, California (1926). R. M. Schindler, Architect
4.1 Section drawing. Library of Congress, Prints
& Photographs Division, HABS, Reproduction
number HABS CAL, 30-NEWBE, 1−10
4.2 Exterior view. Photo Library of Congress, Prints &
Photographs Division, HABS, Reproduction number
HABS CAL, 30-NEWBE, 1−1
![Page 126: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
117
Shape a building in which each successive cross-section
transforms the previous one.
Shape space
through stepwise series
of variations
that evolve out of an initial section.
You need not
know your design destination.
Observe how a succession of
very different spaces
is produced.
Just keep the transitions and
progression of spaces in mind:
The whole will remain coherent.
4 Designing in Cross-Section
![Page 127: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
118 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
4.3 Exterior view during early construction. Lovell
Beach House, Newport Beach, California (1926)
R. M. Schindler, Architect. Reprinted with permission of
the Architecture and Design Collection, Art, Design &
Architecture Museum, University of California, Santa
Barbara. © UC Regents
A linear progression of five massive sitecast
concrete frames establishes the building’s
structure, rhythm, surface texture and views, while
also setting up for its cantilevered interior and
exterior balconies and sleeping porches.
North- and south-facing cross-sections cut at
the midpoint of each bay would reveal eight
very different section elevations and spatial
experiences. The basic spatial volumes are
relatively simple with many recurring elements.
Repetitive glazing patterns, details, finishes and
repeated reference to certain dimensions −
notably key regulating dimensions and proportions
associated with the 12' (3.65m) centerline
dimension of the structural frames − build
continuity across physically diverse spaces.
To delineate, articulate and differentiate spaces,
Schindler adds visual screens, fixed and movable
glazed panels, doorways, slender and thick walls
and overhangs. He freely places them beyond,
between or across the face of the concrete frames.
Railings, level changes, built-in closets, cabinetry
and seating all serve as room dividers.
![Page 128: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 119
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
Chapter 4 explores cross-section (transverse section), a powerful − and frequently
under-utilized − design tool. As in Chapter 3, play once more centers around envision-
ing an entire building, both inside and outside, primarily in section.
In Play 3, final form grew incrementally as a result of adding series of room-sized
configurations in longitudinal section. The goal of Plays 4a and 4b is to design a build-
ing by connecting a sequence of cross-sectional transformations. Each cross-section
is first envisioned in the mind’s eye. It may expand, contract or otherwise reconfigure
the previous building envelope and interior as a transformation of the base form or
previous section. Players incrementally build up a sequence of design cross-sections.
By assembling a series of “snapshots,” they develop a relatively complete transfor-
mation series of building sections and construct a mental schema of the form in its
entirety. Each section is then individually extruded to form 3D space and assembled in
a sequence to create a coherent and evocative building.
The plays in this chapter also build toward constructing and refining a mental 3D model
of the building in its entirety − including the varying qualities of light throughout domi-
nant and served spaces − prior to drawing. For many designers that full visualization
may initially pose a significant challenge. This performance also sharpens a designer’s
ability to generate quick, accurate and evocative drawings from any point of view.
The design plays in this chapter reference no particular building type. They build
thematic clarity by consistently positioning unspecified material parts in relation
to specified zones and margins. The thematic design challenge is to construct the
progression of building sections, spaces and elements such that the core design
concept is clear, coherent and transferable: Another designer should be able to leap
in at any point, implicitly understand the design in a hands-on way well enough to take
over design and lead it in a similar direction.
4.4 Contemporary Amish barn raising. Pennsylvania,
USA. Many different traditions of timber frame barn
construction were similarly based on assembling
individual frames flat on the ground. The completed
frames were then hoisted into place one by one and
braced to create a standing structure. Each section
might vary slightly to accommodate a double-height
space or suspended loft.
In the early 20th century industrialized prefabrication
− and in particular the introduction of loftless
pre-engineered metal barns − heralded the collapse
of traditional regional barn building in North America,
together with associated ways of life. Timber barn
building now persists only in rare isolated pockets
and often as a hybrid of new and traditional systems.
Thus, in the photo, traditional pegged timber frames
are mounted onto plywood decks supported by
concrete block rather than stone construction. Photo
by Bill Coleman © NoToCo, LLC 2013, courtesy of
AmishPhoto.com
Introduction
![Page 129: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
120 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
The use of building planning tools
Zones, margins and grids aid design by ordering the placement of multiple activities
and physical systems while simultaneously mediating, organizing and systematizing
the relationships between them in three-dimensional space. Careful planning and
dimensional coordination allows each architectural element or system to be arrayed
in accordance with its own logical and spatial rhythm while inherently relating to the
overall plan.
Historically, spacious margins and their capacity to accommodate multiple activities and
servant functions on the periphery of a given zone have played a key role in both thematic
and non-thematic design, offering rich and ambiguous overlap and multiple readings of
architectural space. For instance, in the margins of German Baroque cathedrals, highly
developed interstitial space with a complex reading commonly straddles the nave and
the aisle, simultaneously inside and outside dominant space. In subsequent eras, those
margins have provided slack space for growth, change and the introduction of multiple
technical systems, in ways unimagined by their medieval builders.
Contemporary architecture, by contrast, frequently minimizes the physical dimensions
− and the design possibilities − of margins and grids. Reduced to column grid lines,
they optimize the use of structural elements and align the structural field to standard-
ize all structural details and transfer loads within the least possible space, but do not
otherwise contribute to architectural expression.
Carefully established zones, grids, dimensional systems and positioning tools distribute
spaces and structural and other physical elements flexibly, yet coherently and consis-
tently. They generate dimensional order and repetitive rhythms that render overall
building organization comprehensible. Together, they serve as an armature for design,
strongly guiding design direction. At the same time, they define where and how multiple
players can simultaneously and freely design, build, inhabit and use space with a mini-
mum of conflict, interference or disturbance while contributing to the larger design.
Grids, zones and margins
Building planning grids are principal planning tools in
the development of every architectural project. Grids
are (generally) rectilinear frameworks of horizontal and
vertical organizational lines. Grid lines position bearing
walls and columns to ensure continuity and alignment
of building elements.
The spaces between grid lines define zones: dedicated
plan areas for positioning individual served spaces,
together with related parts and configurations. They are
ideally sized to accommodate a wide range of uses.
Thematic and vernacular built environments tend to
self-organize with more built-in latitude and less geo-
metrical and dimensional rigidity than strict grids allow.
Tartan grids were therefore developed in the Nether-
lands by the “SAR” (Stichting Architecten Research /
Foundation for Architects’ Research) in the second half
of the 20th century as a way to carefully coordinate
building spaces and structure while restoring a measure
of lateral freedom and variety in positioning columns,
walls and spatial boundaries. In essence, these more
complex building planning frameworks widen organi-
zational grid lines to create narrower interstitial areas
between zones, or margins.
Margin space serves a number of essential building
planning roles:
• offering essential multi-purpose or “swing” space for
activities that may be annexed and incorporated into
adjacent served spaces to expand them;
• functioning as independent adjacent space for vari-
ous uses;
• providing open-ended space for placing the bearing
walls, columns and piers that define rooms and other
dedicated use areas; and
• providing space for circulation, building systems,
servant spaces and smaller uses.
By weaving together two-way longitudinal and trans-
verse arrays of alternating zones and margins set at
right angles, tartan grids replace the lines and cross-
ing points of traditional planning grids with broader and
more flexible zones and establish parameters for the
width and length of served and servant space.
![Page 130: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
PLAY 4A − THE LONG HOUSE 121
The ultimate goal of play is to design the form entirely in your mind’s eye before draw-
ing the individual sections and corresponding plan.
Visualizing 3D space in the mind’s eye, like translating 2D information into three
dimensions, is an acquired skill. Players predictably arrive at this play with vastly differ-
ent abilities to visualize in the absence of accompanying sketches or models. The
first time through Play 4a, following the Initial Rules of Play, this is absolutely no prob-
lem. With each subsequent performance, try moving through the progressive series
of Additional Rules for Advanced Play in the section that immediately follows, pushing
the limit and going as far as you can before beginning to draw.
To assist in the process the first time through, we recommend starting by visualizing a
series of identical base forms that are set apart at varying distances that correspond
roughly to one or more room lengths. Next, begin to systematically envision the space
between each pair of base forms, defining the rooms, spaces and elements of hori-
zontal and vertical circulation that link them. Remembering Play 1, start to inhabit the
zones of transition along the length and width of the building. Recalling Play 2, feel
free to make smaller-scale local adjustments to the overall form and to articulate the
exterior building surface with architectural elements, projections and spaces …
Play 4a
Designing in Cross-Section
or
The Long House
12'
3.60m
8'
2.40m
12'
3.60m
32
9.60m
E<0 0co
..f
E. ~ ~
0>
E<0 0co
..f
12'
3.60m
8'
2.40m
12'
3.60m
E<0 0co
..f<0
![Page 131: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
122 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
INITIAL RULES OF PLAY
Base form
The base form features a 32' (9.60m) wide central space with a high ceiling sheltered
by a roof truss of unspecified construction. Within that space, freestanding columns
support an intermediate level. On either side of the roofed structure, pre-established
bays/zones guide potential expansion of the section.
Spacing of base forms
Throughout this play, habitable rooms are assumed to extend at least 8' (2.40m)
between wall centerlines. That dimension therefore defines the minimal spatial
module: Base forms must be spaced a minimum of one module apart.
Specify building orientation
Visualize the difference in character, extent and location of available sunlight and how
it may affect design along each side of the building.
Specify materials and construction
Selecting systems and materials for the roof structure, ceiling/floor assemblies,
walls and columns is essential for this design performance. Players may initially
define all parts and systems in advance or play hands-on and let the design suggest
appropriate systems.
Follow the zones and margins
Load-bearing structure, partition walls, territorial divisions and areas of dedicated circu-
lation cut by each section should fall within the 8' (2.40m) margins. The 12' (3.60m)
zones are reserved for served activity space. Section cuts should depict the quality of
served spaces. (As always, avoid cutting through walls that run parallel to the direction
of the cut.)
Set the width of rooms and spaces
Any space can simply align with the perimeter of its zone. However, space may other-
wise expand to incorporate all or part of an abutting margin on one or both sides. Or it
may be interrupted, curtailed such that it only partially fills a zone.
Shift structural elements to fine-tune space and dimensions
There are no precise preset column or beam lines. Columns and other load-bearing
parts can shift a bit within the margins to vary the widths of individual spaces. Partic-
ularly as you begin, let architectural experience drive their placement. (Feel free to
assume that cantilevers, bent or transfer beams, haunches and other offset structural
supports and some regularization of dimensions would rationalize the structure during
a subsequent design phase.)
![Page 132: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
PLAY 4A − THE LONG HOUSE 123
Vary spaces within the dominant central bay
While the middle zone implies dominant and possibly continuous space, nothing in the
rules limits its potential for play and variation. As each section evolves, so may middle
zone spaces and spatial relationships.
5 sections
In initial play, limit the number of sections to five.
Create a coherent building
The sections and the spaces they represent should add up to a coherent whole.
Think form
Throughout the play, try to create and articulate the building and its various spaces
primarily in your mind’s eye.
Final product
The final presentation should demonstrate that you have worked through a coher-
ent 3D design in some detail. Feel free to add exterior axonometric or perspective
sketches or other explanatory details and written comments to the sections and plan.
Media
Freehand drawing, 2D rendering programs and 3D digital and physical modeling can
all play a useful role. However, in this play, beyond a certain point, developing a detailed
3D digital model for purposes beyond axonometric exterior projection can easily run
counter to the purpose.
Design in the mind’s eye
Brunelleschi is said to have designed while pacing back
and forth along a narrow corridor, visualizing form. Louis
Sullivan would instead walk the streets of Chicago, let-
ting the design of a new building emerge in his imagina-
tion. He would then return to his office, sit down at the
drafting board and draw the building he had developed
in his mind’s eye.
A variation on that story surrounds the design of Frank
Lloyd Wright’s E. J. Kaufmann Residence: Three months
after the completion of a painstaking initial survey of the
proposed western Pennsylvania site, Taliesin appren-
tices witnessed not one outward indication that Wright
had begun to design.
The client then surprised Wright with a phone call, an-
nouncing that he was en route, 140 miles (225 km) away.
Over the next three hours, the 68-year-old Wright pro-
duced one detailed plan after another, then a building
section followed by a large-scale rendered elevation
of Fallingwater. It was evident from the drawings that
Wright had visualized in his mind’s eye not just his own
fully developed design, but also the precise location of
every tree and boulder. By the time the client arrived, the
architect was ready and waiting …
4.5 Fallingwater. Mill Run, Pennsylvania (1935).
Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect. Photo by Jack
E. Boucher. Library of Congress, Prints &
Photographs Division, HABS, Reproduction
number HABS PA,26-OHPY.V,1— 86 (CT)
![Page 133: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
124 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
ADDITIONAL RULES FOR ADVANCED PLAY
Transition to advanced play
To begin, modify the base section to design four new cross-sections with different
spatial and habitable qualities. Consider multiple-height spaces to extend the design
hierarchy and varieties of spatial experience. Subsequently, link the sections sequen-
tially and design the interstitial space.
Begin restricting sketch activity
Beginning with the base form, build up sectional changes sequentially, this time in your
mind’s eye. Try to first envision each different section and its spaces hands-off. Then
try to limit your concurrent renderings or sketches to 2D projections that directly add
to basic understanding of form that you have first envisioned, rather than letting your
design hand take the lead.
Further exercise your mind’s eye
As your ability and confidence increase, try to develop each successive section without
concurrently creating or referring to a building plan. Once you have mentally envisioned
the whole form in detail, document the entire sequence of sections immediately.
Add one or more floor plans … eventually
Each time you reach the limit of your understanding of the form, stop and develop or
extend the plan. Insert section cut symbols and observe how accurately they align with
your sections as visualized. From that point on, freely refer to building plans. As you
continue to design, develop plan and section in tandem. Evolution of form in plan −
together with sketch details as needed − will fill in your understanding of the progres-
sion and relationship of ideas and spaces, promote dimensional and proportional unity
in the third dimension and open up additional possibilities.
Most advanced play
In the most advanced version of Play 4a, drawing of any kind is deferred until the
creation of final presentation drawings, once the entire design has been completed
in your mind’s eye. The completed design should then be documented as a proof of
concept in longitudinal section as well as cross-sections and one or more plans.
A coherent form narrative
The goal of this play is to develop a progression of moves that makes sense, rather
than cataloging an extensive series of disparate spatial possibilities suggested by the
base form.
6−10 sections
Feel free to continue the series beyond 5 sections until you have adequately explored
variations. Although 6−10 sections is generally sufficient, there is no maximum as
long as your variations remain meaningful.
![Page 134: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 125
STRATEGIES
Determine the structural system
Visualize and materialize the base form. Use that initial section to determine in prin-
ciple where and how columns, piers, load-bearing walls and horizontal members will
carry and transfer loads. Possible structural systems include steel or timber bents,
masonry walls paired with horizontal wooden beams, reinforced concrete supporting
steel trusses or steel beams bearing upon steel or reinforced concrete piers.
Explore how design with zones and margins opens up served and
servant space
While column lines and margins both determine the placement of building structure, their
intended purpose and use are entirely different. Column lines locate structure at exact
crossing points and alignments for the purpose of standardizing, rationalizing and mini-
mizing structure and unassigned space and simplifying engineering and construction.
Margins articulate design by providing a degree of freedom in positioning columns, piers,
walls and other load-bearing structure within margins. As a result, larger spaces can
span a variety of widths, while the smallest spaces may actually be placed wholly outside
any zone within a margin.
Consider how positioning rules anticipate the architectural expression
of structure
Precisely where columns are positioned within margins will start to suggest how struc-
tural connections are made above. For instance: Their placement may indicate whether
beams bear directly onto columns, directly attach to continuous multistory columns from
the side or use transfer beams to shift loads horizontally onto bearing structure. Posi-
tioning rules also begin to suggest the architectural expression of the bearing structure:
whether it is buried within walls, visibly engaged in walls, uniformly offset from adjacent
partition or curtain walls or entirely freestanding.
Establish continuities
Visualize the elements that build continuities between sequential cross-sections:
• corridors, stairs and other circulation elements
• vertical open spaces that build visual links between different floors
• walls and other structural elements
• ridge lines that build a relationship between one roof section to the next
These and other design elements similarly link together the building’s constituent
parts. They help to fill out your visualization and build a coherent whole.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 135: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
126 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
Sketch the cross-sectional light
In Chapter 3, longitudinal building sections provided an overview of rhythms, patterns
and directions of light throughout the building and how they reinforce the overall
architecture, flow and rhythm and lead people through space. In the current chapter,
cross-sections serve to augment available information about the experiential char-
acter of individual daylit spaces at a variety of scales. They clarify:
• sun angles and corresponding character and levels of illumination throughout the year
• how deeply light will penetrate into any given room interior
• how light washes adjacent ceiling, floor and wall surfaces
• where possible lighting “hot spots” may occur and how to mitigate them
• the dance of light and shadow throughout various parts of room interiors over time
• how various light reflection and diffusion strategies and configurations change interior
lighting conditions
• how to use daylight to highlight key interior elements
• how and where to use artificial lighting to balance or supplement levels of natural
illumination
Even at the earliest stages of design, architectural cross-sections should be drawn with
building orientation and the intrinsic qualities of specific kinds of directional light clearly
in mind. For instance, in the temperate zone of the northern hemisphere, northerly
sky shine provides diffuse “painterly” blue-white light year round from floor to ceiling.
Yellow-red western sunlight is glaringly strong and highly directional when sun angles
are low and consequently often requires seasonal shading and solar gain mediation.
Once the basic design and sense of character are established, quickly rendered digital
sketch modeling with proper solar orientation becomes invaluable in pinpointing daily
and seasonal lighting conditions.
![Page 136: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 127
BEAR IN MIND
Let the architecture set ceiling heights
The height of each space should be determined not by zoning, but by preferred archi-
tectural character and ranges of likely use, together with any inherent constraints such
as proportions or material and geometrical limits of the section.
Build-in good proportions
In incorporating rooms with fractional module lengths, try to build-in key dimensions
and proportions that are consonant with the basic dimensions of the module, zone
width, ceiling height and surrounding spaces.
Aim for quality, not quantity
Try to design spaces and structures coherently and interestingly using a restrained
design palette of details and structural elements.
Design all spaces as figural and spatial entities
All visible and habitable space, regardless of its use, possesses a wide range of common
formal and experiential attributes: It possesses size, shape, proportion, hierarchy, direc-
tion and architectural character. And it offers unique experiential qualities defined by its
place within the flow and spatial sequence of the building, and its combined qualities
of continuity and containment, light, views and ventilation. All habitable space, includ-
ing circulation, residual “left-over” space and other open space throughout the building
therefore requires active and intentional form making.
![Page 137: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
128 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
Sample plays 4.1 and 4.2 present alternate compositions based
on a design play that was formulated roughly as follows: “Design
a complex structure by adding variations in section as you move
from one end of the building to the other.” In both cases, initial
design occurred entirely in section. Plan and axonometric views
were generated after the fact as a proof of concept.
Both sample plays offer variations on a venerable theme: tripar-
tite form in which both served and servant spaces flank linear
and continuous central dominant space. In both sequences,
each successive section similarly modifies the spatial charac-
ter of the building by adding, removing or displacing internal
elements; manipulating the roof form throughout; and/or freely
extending outward on either side of the central bay.
Both schemes incorporate the same tripartite structure of 33'
(10m) zones. The outer zones flanking the dominant central bay
are themselves further subdivided: Within their 33' (10m) width,
two sub-zones of just over 13' (4m) surround an internal margin
of about 6'-6" (2m).
Spatial transformation is partially constrained in both schemes
in ways that promote fundamental order throughout the form
while allowing significant spatial change to occur: In general, the
continuous central space limits sideways expansion. It adjusts
freely in height and length but maintains the width of its defining
high roof throughout. By contrast, spaces within the outer zones
freely expand or contract in width and length. In the Grange, their
height is constrained by the geometry of the uniformly pitched
roof. In the Galleria, the height of secondary roof structures is
kept below the primary roof but their form, while tending to fall
within the established zones, appears otherwise unconstrained.
Sample Plays 4.1 and 4.2
“Long House” sectional
transformation sequence
Sample Play 4.1 “Grange” sectional transformation
OJ
h >"" ..;1
( ;
(~
b. ,, ~
'"(.
I
"~. t:
(""
d.
e
r
~.- - ~~. .
"
d d d d
d d d d d dd
d d
d
d
d
![Page 138: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAYS 4.1 AND 4.2 − LONG HOUSE TRANSFORMATIONS 129
Both sequences exhibit development that is intuitive, logical and
based on clear spatial concepts. Nonetheless, form only reveals
so much about its underlying creative process: How were the
buildings conceived? What drove each design? Did any concep-
tual section served as a template? Does the progression of
sections as depicted follow the actual order of their development?
We cannot safely assume that either sequence of sections
first developed in the order presented. In the freeform Galleria,
it is hard to seize upon any single section in the mind’s eye of
the designer that drove the development of height and width
throughout all zones. In the Grange, the roof form seems to imply
that the conceptual full section D drove design, with all other
sections easily derived by subtraction. Nonetheless, play could
easily have started with section A. The final form might have
gradually revealed itself as design progressed with section D
already vaguely in the designer’s mind.
Out of the same combined tripartite organizational schema,
design methodology, dimensions, building zones and margins,
two radically different architectures easily emerge in these
sample plays.
Thematic design course drawings © 1985 John R. Dale,
courtesy of the designerSample Play 4.2 “Galleria” sectional transformation
(.
I' "'".J:
a
~. 2 . 50 11
;/';2 . 5111
h;2 . ~ 1I
:2 .1).
b
(I('
0, . '5>
If
c
h ' . ,. I v<
c
c
c
c c c
![Page 139: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
130 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
Special Topic
Sectional transformation in a single bay
Tischler House, Westwood, California (1950) R.M. Schindler, Architect
Rudoph Schindler’s Tischler House is experientially rich. Against a single bay that
is quite simple in plan, it juxtaposes a masterful sequence of sectional transforma-
tions. The large sheltering roof serves as a unifying element and provides continuity
from S1 through S9. As the ground form transforms to accommodate the changing
topography, volumes are suspended (S1, S3) and floors are added (S2), before finally
compacting into a simple volume in a state of repose (S9).
4.6 Exterior. Photo © 2003 Steven Ward, courtesy of
the photographer
4.7 Reference plan
![Page 140: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 131
4.8 Transverse section sequence Copyrighted drawings by Wendy Dailey, courtesy of the
Judith Sheine Collection
S2 S3
S4
S7
S5
S8
S6
S9
S1
![Page 141: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
132 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
For many centuries, particularly throughout Europe and its former colonies, thematic
and non-thematic architecture have called upon tripartite zoning’s powerful inherent
principles of spatial and zoning division. Tripartite zoning famously appears throughout
the 9th century Plan of St. Gall and in medieval buildings as diverse as Romanesque
churches and barns.
It remains in common use in a variety of building types − particularly throughout
contemporary Europe − and has contributed a widespread and enduring principle of
fundamental organization to monumental and everyday architecture alike.
In the historical examples shown, the width of the roof, its structural system and bays
jointly set possibilities for the design that follows.
Setting zone widths that closely coincide with roof and bay structure often continues
to provide a useful strategy.
Special Topic
Tripartite zoning
4.10 Detail of the Plan of St Gall. St. Gallen, Switzerland
(9th century). The layout of the partially realized
Carolingian cathedral and the many unbuilt
surrounding buildings are based on a tripartite
spatial division. Detail of the copyrighted photo of the
Löpfe-Benz facsimile (1952) from The Plan of St.
Gall in Brief, courtesy of the author.
4.9 Tithe Barn. Great Coxwell, England (late 13th
century). This sole surviving building of a medieval
grange features massive stone walls and a steeply
pitched slate roof. Photo © 1953 with permission of
Edwin Smith / RIBA Library Photographs Collection
![Page 142: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 133
The University of British Columbia’s Museum of Anthropology in Vancouver show-
cases an extraordinary collection of Northwest Coast First Nations art. Upon entering
the museum, visitors head downward through a sequence of regularly spaced precast
concrete post-and-beam frames surmounted by curved acrylic skylights. After pass-
ing through a series of low ceilinged interior exhibit galleries, they emerge once more
and pass into the light-filled rhythmic progression of concrete frames or gates of the
main exhibit hall.
The frames inspired by the post-and-beam gates of the indigenous Haida people grow
progressively taller and thinner in a rhythmic sequence. In the regular progression of
structural forms, each successive section transforms the previous one, gradually rais-
ing the ceiling to 49' (15m). The resulting form permits the building to shelter carved
totem poles up to 40' (12m) in height, while providing space for lighting and technical
systems and carrying the structure that supports the glazed roof. Structural glass walls
build corners of light and provide unbroken views outward onto the landscape. Alter-
nating bands of light and dark reinforce the primary direction of the built field as visitors
are led through the exhibition hall, drawn toward the powerful and unbroken landscape
carefully framed in perspective at the building’s end.
Special Topic
Structuring light to organize a built field
Museum of Anthropology, Vancouver (1976) Arthur Erickson, Architect
4.12 Exterior view showing the regular array of
ascending concrete frames
4.11 Interior view within the great exhibition hall
Photos © 2013 Patricia A. Duff, courtesy of the photographer
![Page 143: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
134 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
Play 4b
Design in Cross-Section
or
Running Roofs
3'·6" / 1.05m2' /60cm
7'/ 2.10m
3' /90cm
8' / 2040cm
4' 9'·6" 9'·6" 4' 9'·6" 9'·6" 4' 9'·6" 9'·6" 4'1 1 2.85 1 2.85m 1 1 2.85m 1 2.85m 1 1 2.85m 1 2.85m 1 11.2m 1.2m 1.2m 1.2m
B" /20 cm
9"122.5cm
8' / 204m
8' /204m
8' /204m
1'· 6"16'
4.80m45cm
1'·6" 1'·6"4' 16'
1.2m 4.80m45cm 45cm
1'·6" 1'·6"4' 16'
1.2m 4.80m45cm 45cm
1'· 6"
45cm
4 '
1.2m
17'·6"
5.25m
15'·6"1.65m
17'·6"
5.25m
s-«1.65m
17'·6"
5.25
4'
1.2m
![Page 144: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
PLAY 4B − RUNNING ROOFS 135
RULES OF PLAY
Base form
Use the roof together with related zones as shown.
Maintain the zones
The zones and margins must remain fairly constant while flexibly positioning each
individual part.
Maintain the relationship between roofs and zones
Roof sections may be raised or lowered. As a rule, they should maintain their relation-
ship to underlying zones.
Develop the floor plan in tandem with your sequence of sections
Throughout this version of play, as each new floor space is created in section, immedi-
ately place it onto the building plan and fine-tune the overall design.
Presentation
Show all sections and a plan, freely incorporating supplementary exterior axonomet-
rics, sketches of details and text.
This play further explores design development in cross-section, starting with a base form
that establishes the roof as a continuous primary organizing and unifying design element
throughout the sequence of sectional transformations. It also provides an opportunity to
begin to explore the cross-sectional possibilities of using continuous roofs as elements
that catch, redirect and filter light in ways that organize the built field below. As in Play
4a, it once again emphasizes the use of grids, zones and margins as organizational tools
for positioning architectural elements and configuring building spaces.
![Page 145: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
136 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
STRATEGIES
Let the roof structure your transformation
This play relies on the continuity provided by series of parallel roofs above to work as a
counterpoint to the free play of space and supporting structure below and to unify the
design. The roof’s stable presence allows for shifts in the shape or rhythm of columns
and/or for wholesale substitution of different load-bearing elements. While keeping
the relationship of the roof sections to the zones constant, the roof and its sectional
character can also change.
Build continuity before introducing changeability
Start by building coherence. Only after continuity in the form has been achieved is it
time to entertain moves that represent a radical shift in form or character.
Play freely with the façades
The end façades need not be load-bearing or fixed relative to the roof. They may freely
evolve via localized massing moves and articulation. Designers may freely extrude or
contract them and/or create exterior space protected by an extended overhang or
new secondary roofs.
Play with intermediate floors
Experiment with various sectional combinations of balconies, mezzanines, full-height
spaces, interrupted spaces and stacked minimum height spaces. Observe how each
sectional change affects spatial relationships and how lighting possibilities and strate-
gies adjust in turn.
Design the form of light
Diagram and design the shape of natural light as it is introduced to the building and/or
cast onto major elements and planes at selected times of day.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 146: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 4.3 − RUNNING ROOFS 137
This sample play is again based on a tripartite zoning scheme. However, the basic under-
lying spatial organizing principle is fundamentally different from the continuous domi-
nant central spaces that anchored the Grange and Galleria sample plays. Here, the
scheme’s dominant organizing feature takes the form of three continuous parallel roofs.
This design strategy allows the design of space under each roof to develop freely and
independently from the organization and articulation of space in adjacent bays.
In S1, space follows the tripartite division suggested by the roofs. In S3, two zones have
full-height spaces while floors of standardized height are stacked in the remaining zone.
In S4, packing and stacking rooms under the roof maximizes the amount of available
served or use space. In S5, a pyramidal roof interrupts the continuity of the running roofs
and space underneath runs perpendicular to the zones. At the points where the building
ends, one roof and half of another extend outward to define major outside space.
Sample Play 4.3
Running Roofs
Plan and section are developed in parallel. Each plan
segment is added to the last in order to build the whole.
It is useful to work simultaneously on both the ground floor
and roof plans.
S2
S2
S3
S3
S4
S4
S5
S5
S6
S6
S1
S1
Sequential cross-sections
![Page 147: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
138 DESIGNING IN CROSS-SECTION
Special Topic
Catching and arraying light to organize
a built field
Museum Ludwig and Philharmonic Hall, Cologne (1986) Busmann + Haberer, Architects
The roofs of the Museum Ludwig and Philharmonic Hall work together as a major
unifying and organizing design element of the diverse forms and spaces below. They
jointly function as a rhythmic directional field, organizing the overall composition of
each building in plan, in section and in light. Continuous series of light scoops raised
above the flat roofs of both forms introduce parallel luminous bands of light throughout
the buildings. Entering light is then shaped in various ways, incorporating a great deal
of small scale adjustment, lateral shifts, stops and starts, etc. in response to the specific
requirements of the architecture, its overall organization and program. It is diffuse in
multi-story public spaces, filtered in bands or in grids of arrayed squares in galleries.
4.13 Aerial view from the Cologne Cathedral. Photo © 1986 Thomas Robbin, courtesy of
the photographer
![Page 148: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 139
Sectional design, when fully integrated into the design process, contributes formal
clarity and solidifies design concepts. Variations on a particular sectional theme may
also serve to unite buildings of very different origins and styles.
During the extraordinary period of the late 1920s, three villas − R.M. Schindler’s Lovell
Beach House, Konstantin Melnikov’s House and Le Corbusier’s Villa Baizeau − were
similarly designed around variations on one particular sectional theme: spatial inter-
lock between double-height spaces that face one another and are vertically offset by
one story.
Diagram the section of each house, drawing only major horizontal and vertical defining
elements. Document the proportions accurately and observe the relationship of various
key dimensions to human scale.
• What patterns of rhythm and alternation between single- and double-height floors do
you observe?
• How do the three buildings differ?
• What elements reveal whether each section cut is transverse or longitudinal?
Research and locate the corresponding floor plans:
• How does correlating plan to section expand your understanding of each building?
• How do light and circulation work with the longitudinal direction of the building?
To cap this structured observation:
• Design a sectional variation based on the theme of interlocking double-height spaces.
• As in Plays 4a and 4b, use your section as the base move of a sectional transforma-
tion sequence.
• After creating the sequence, create a building by extruding the series of sections
into modules and connecting them.
How easy is it to create a rich sequence of spaces by morphing your own Schindler-
Melnikov-Le Corbusier section?
4.16 Villa Baizeau. Tunis (1930). Le Corbusier, Architect
Drawings © 2013 Andrés Mignucci, based on drawings by
the architects
4.15 Melnikov House. Moscow (1929). Konstantin
Melnikov, Architect
4.14 Lovell Beach House. Santa Monica, California,
USA (1926). R.M. Schindler, Architect
Structured Observation
Interlocking section
![Page 149: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
140
A dance of grid, topography and invention
In 1839, sea captain and surveyor Jean-Jacques
Vioget was commissioned to create a plan for
Yerba Buena, a sleepy Mexican territorial outpost
of tents and cabins. Vioget laid out a modest grid of
streets following the cardinal directions. It featured
a central plaza surrounded by 412' (126m) × 275'
(84m) orthogonal blocks, nestled in the fields
between scattered steep hills and a bayside cove.
Fuelled by the California Gold Rush and the
Mexican-American War, the diverse “boom town”
population grew from 50 to 25,000 between 1844
and 1850. The urban grid of “San Francisco” was
hastily extended. By the time the advantages of
adjusting the grid and terracing roadways into the
steep hills became apparent, it was already too late
to halt construction and renegotiate property lines.
Instead, owners adjusted prevailing building types
to suit their particular slope, orientation and building
entry points one building at a time.
5.1 Topographic Map © 1960, courtesy of Planning
Department, City and County of San Francisco,
California. Image from Earth Sciences and Map
Library, University of California, Berkeley
As a direct consequence of that grid, San Francisco
is renowned for picturesque Victorian architecture;
stunning and unobstructed urban vistas of hills,
beaches, bridges, towers, bays, islands and
coastlines beyond; and four dozen distinct and tight-
knit neighborhoods nestled against hillsides and
spilling down across the coastal plain.
More important than the end product was the
additive process residents invented to forge a city.
It created a singular culture − one that continues
to celebrate invention, innovation, improvisation,
individual freedom, optimism and moving and
looking steadily forward with resilience.
![Page 150: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
141
5Start with a simple section comprised of two walls and a roof. Transform it into a more
elaborate form, step by step.
Design steadily forward, resisting any temptation to make revisions.
Think a few moves ahead and
improvise,
unphased by
unexpected turns.
Learn not to cling
to preconceptions.
Trust that your journey
will succeed.
Visualization and Resilience
![Page 151: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
142 VISUALIZATION AND RESILIENCE
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
Plays 1−4 encouraged players to explore alternatives risk-free − to sidetrack, plunge
forward, retrace steps and redirect design at will. In design performances based on
open-ended give-and-take with form, the goal was to ultimately arrive at a full, coherent
and interesting sequence of moves while mastering discrete tools, methods and skills.
Play 5 focuses on designing forward, removing sidetracks and “do-overs.” It is intended
to solidify your ability to think form and introduces no new tools, approaches or struc-
tured observation. The emphasis is on designing forward − thoughtfully, intuitively and
resiliently. After exploring design in section in Plays 3 and 4 and focusing on design
in section in the mind’s eye in Chapter 4, this play hones your ability to think ahead,
envision and retain in the mind’s eye a series of optional moves and where each one
leads − to mentally compare alternative directions, select the most promising one and
commit to it. Only then should you begin to draw.
The goal is to create a transformation sequence in cross-section from start to finish
in one steady unbroken linear design progression. As in a live performance, there is
no reconsidering, second-guessing, backtracking, erasing, taking back or “un-doing.”
As in calligraphy or the so-called “touch-move” rule in chess, every move, once begun
hands-on, “counts”: Every time you start to draw a move, it is carved in stone.
Exploring alternatives in the mind’s eye is an essential design habit. The hands-off
visualization in this play encourages you to follow your intuitive preferences and see
where they lead. It requires an ability to foresee possible sequences of moves and
a fair amount of self-confidence. Particularly throughout the first rounds of perfor-
mance, it is likely to require a great deal of resilience and improvisation.
• Think carefully before you act.
• Do your considered best and move on.
• Allow your errors to stand in the harsh light of public scrutiny.
• Accept the unforeseen consequences of your actions.
• Don’t look back.
It’s not the note you play that’s the wrong
note — it’s the note you play afterwards
that makes it right or wrong.
— Miles Davis
Introduction
![Page 152: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
PLAY 5 − DON’T GO BACK! 143
INITIAL RULES OF PLAY
Base form
Start from the base form provided.
Develop each move fully in the mind’s eye and commit to it prior to drawing
The first time through the play, this requirement may be relaxed to allow quick diagram-
matic exploratory sketches.
Shape the site
Performing Play 5 includes designing its site as an integral part of the overall design.
Draw in section
Record each move in one unaccompanied section drawing.
Moves and adjustments permitted throughout play:
• transforming the site profile
• adding new forms and elements
• penetrating walls, floors, ceilings and roofs
• adding connectors to link parts of the form
• stretching or shrinking parts, including the base form
Play 5
Visualization and Resilience
or
Don’t Go Back!
c> E-" ~... .
I ~
" I E~ ~~, (')
3'-4"
1.00m
J6~O:'"
4.80m
3'-4"
1.00m
4'-4"'1 .50m
8"'2Ocm1'-0"'30=2'-0"'60=
" I E~ ~~, (')
![Page 153: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
144 VISUALIZATION AND RESILIENCE
Disallowed moves
• Do not remove parts once they have been added.
• Do not retrace your steps to undo moves that you regret.
No shortcuts
For designers who enter play with particularly strong visualization skills already in
place, leaping ahead is often a problem. In this play, a disciplined step-by-step record
of your design process is necessary to review moves with a critical eye.
Number of moves
Continue until you feel you have documented coherent form as a proof of concept and
reached a good stopping point.
Repeat your performance
Repeat this play until you build sufficient visualization skills to design hands-off with
confidence.
ADDITIONAL RULES FOR ADVANCED PLAY
In this play’s most austere and challenging form:
There are no tryouts
Experimental pre-move “try-out” sketches are not permitted.
Alterations to existing form are severely limited
• The size, location and proportion of buildings and parts, once drawn, cannot be
adjusted.
• Fundamental geometries may not be altered.
• While the site may be adjusted, building forms may not be reshaped in response.
• Openings in building surfaces and connections between parts may be added.
• No other portions of any drawn form may be erased.
Playing in an unforgiving manner quickly forces players to perform at their best and
boosts their ability to “think form.” It is, moreover, consistent with the idea of conversa-
tion with form:
As in verbal conversation or posting on the Internet: Things, once stated, can never
be unsaid.
![Page 154: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 145
STRATEGIES
Don’t “Just do it!”
Overly impulsive design moves are likely to create hurdles a few moves later. Always
consider alternatives before moving. Whether or not you experience eureka! moments
during environmental design, it is always a process of envisioning, exploring and
weighing series of alternate creative solutions, applying judgment and foresight to
select the best option.
Keep moving forward
Balance deliberation and action. Move the rhythm of design steadily on, as if it were
an improvised live performance. Do not allow the design process to stall by getting
sidetracked into endless exploration of possibilities.
Pace yourself
Forward motion must resolutely occur one single meaningful move at a time. Creating
rhythmic sequences of distinct moves enhances your general ability to move forward
in design evenly and gracefully.
Mentally record the paths not taken
Be prepared to retrace your steps and point out alternatives that were identified and
explored but set aside. Be prepared to explain why.
Evaluate your sequence
The dual prohibition against taking back moves and/or covering your tracks makes
this an ideal play for assessing your design instincts:
• Where, in retrospect, should you have moved differently?
• Where did your design instincts or ability to project and envision alternative futures
fail you?
• Where was a strong-willed decision to plow forward − or to take a long detour to get
more or less back on the original track − a mistake?
Practice, practice, practice
In all performance, talent is developed through repeated play. Given the open-ended
nature of this play, the benefits of repetition hold particularly true.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 155: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
146 VISUALIZATION AND RESILIENCE
BEAR IN MIND
Holding design up to continuous scrutiny
Reevaluating moves and considering options is essential throughout any design process.
Our legacy charrette design ethos − dating back to the Ecole des Beaux Arts − advo-
cates continuous design and presentation improvement up to the very last moment …
provided that the last-minute changes hold up under critical scrutiny. Conversely, few
sins are deadlier in academic studio culture than cutting short design inquiry and “miss-
ing opportunities” or glossing over messy problems.
That academic training carries over into practice: Contracts anticipate a certain amount
of aesthetic redesign. Building dimensions, systems, components and details adjust
throughout design and construction. Built details that fail to look as imagined may be
demolished, redesigned and rebuilt.
Resilience
Nonetheless, many problems remain beyond the designer’s control. There are also
unyielding constraints such as budgets and schedules. Renovations and fast-tracked
new construction rarely allow for adjusting initial conditions in order to design forward
optimally or turning back the clock, going back to the drawing board, wiping the slate
clean and starting over.
Building upon existing constraints and inherited problems without compromising design
outcomes requires improvisation and innovation. Above all, it requires the ability to:
• creatively transform drawbacks into springboards for successful design;
• think a number of moves ahead in three dimensions;
• effectively communicate solutions on the fly, in words and sketches;
• design forward at times when the project cannot stop or reverse course;
• visualize alternative ways out of a tight spot; and
• accept what cannot be changed, even in simple matters of form.
When the inherent limitations of your own previous moves come to light in Play 5, you
may identify design strategies ways to steer around the problem; cycle back by devoting
subsequent moves to retrofitting the form as a correction; or seek inspiration in the new
situation to reenergize design and relaunch it in new and promising directions.
However you proceed, you must move forward with resilience.
![Page 156: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 5.1 − THE MOON HOUSE 147
The Moon House transformation sequence follows the less severe initial rules of play.
Its depiction of structure is deliberately simple and cartoon-like. Exaggerating the
dimensions and line weights of key details during initial design often conveys innate
properties and draws distinctions better than strictly accurate and neutral portrayal
would. Rooting the drawings in physical reality while also skewing a bit from the real
world makes the sections readable and evocative, but also open-ended and playful.
It also helps the designer to continually register and bear in mind material properties.
The rendering style emphasizes the basic contrasts and intrinsic possibilities of the
systems, while highlighting how and where the systems meet and how loads are
supported by structure. Even at this diagrammatic stage, the exaggerated rendering
style indicates two distinct systems. The battered walls start thick and taper inward
as they extend vertically, conveying the stacking of unspecified heavy material. The
triangle of the roof does not reveal whether it is a wooden or steel truss, although
subsequent moves suggest timber posts and beams.
The massive vault-like walls invite carving to create penetrations: simple punched
openings, niches, beam pockets and bearing shelves. The lighter roofs and interior
bearing structure suggest some variety of wood or steel framing that might also incor-
porate any number of alternative flooring assemblies, from structural tongue and
groove flooring to a composite light concrete floor.
Shaping, sloping, excavating and carving the site is integral to this sample play.
A few regrettable moves create problems or point in undesirable directions:
• In the aftermath of M9, the relationship between the building’s entrance and its
interior space remains unresolved.
• M11 attempts to improve unfortunate aspects of the spatial organization.
• M13 and M14 do undoubtedly partially “correct” it.
• Although the addition of the moonlit landscape that appears in the last move to
some extent justifies M14, the view appears to have been invented after the fact.
Sample Play 5.1
Visualization and resilience
or The Moon House
MOON HOUSE DEVELOPED FINAL STATE
![Page 157: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
148 VISUALIZATION AND RESILIENCE
BASE FORM Two bearing walls support a roof.
M6 A new portico to the right
M1 Additional height accommodates a new
floor
M7 Another to the left
M2 Widening the section requires a column
to support the span.
M8 The ground form is carved out to the left;
an arched opening allows access to this
space.
![Page 158: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 5.1 − THE MOON HOUSE 149
M3 The column is displaced to the right.
M9 The basement floor is dug deeper.
M12 The roof is raised by extending the walls
that support it.
M4 A partial basement is carved out.
M10 A level change in the ground form with a
new set of steps to the outside
M13 An opening is cut from the basement to
the outside porch.
M5 Additional height allows clerestory
lighting on both sides.
M11 The basement is fully excavated.
M14 A window is cut to open the view to the
moon and the sea.
![Page 159: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
150 VISUALIZATION AND RESILIENCE
This play was created in two rounds, following the more severe Additional Rules For
Advanced Play. Each move fully incorporates without change all previous moves.
During the first “lightning round,” the design was rapidly envisioned then recorded
in quick gestural sketches. The final rough sketch inspired the expanded Channel
House transformation sequence. In the extended play sequence, each step consti-
tutes a simple discrete move and is depicted in a different color to highlight the strictly
additive and linear nature of the two-step design process: The primary form is first
established through M3. It is then articulated throughout M4−M9.
Play starts with a room-sized C-shaped form of enclosure that incorporates floor,
wall and roof. The form appears to be prefabricated, perhaps steel or concrete. It
is intrinsically open and predisposed to interlocking spatially with other channels.
Those inherent properties of the form are further enhanced by the uneven length of
the legs, all of which makes for ease of play centered on dynamic interlock of space.
M2 offsets and mirrors the starting section, establishing the spatial relationship
between the two primary form-giving elements. M3 encloses the primary volume and
adds a small solarium with the introduction of a second smaller channel-shaped form
composed of an unspecified glazing material.
Waiting until M4 to introduce the ground form is certainly counterintuitive. However,
as in Sample Play 5.1, the site is neither a given nor a pre-determined existing condi-
tion. As a designed component like any other, it is added subject to the designer’s will,
judgment and preferred design sequence.
It is also quite possible that the section of the whole was already fully formed in the
designer’s mind: The remaining question was then what would become building and
what would be shaped as landscape. In early design diagrams created by Wright or
Scarpa, for instance, materially undefined shapes and objects often appear where
needed in the built field to add spatial and dimensional definition. Some subsequently
become building; others freestanding built forms; and yet others planting beds.
As a whole, the Channel House illustrates how rich and complex spatial readings can
build when very simple elements are combined in an equally simple linear progression
of moves.
Sample Play 5.2
Visualization and resilience
or The Channel House
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
BASE MOVE
“Lightning Round” sketches
![Page 160: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 5.2 − THE CHANNEL HOUSE 151
M1 A second channel is reflected and
displaced from the first.
BASE MOVE: A channel-like form offers partial
containment.
FINAL STATE
M4 A ground form is introduced.
M7 A stair connects the two main levels.
M2 A glazed channel spans the two
larger channels.
M5 A ground form level change
M8 A cantilevered balcony extends the
terrace.
M3 A thick wall closes off the section and
implies earth retention.
M6 Railings overlooking the double-height
spaces
M9 Door openings with protective
overhangs appear.
![Page 161: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
152
Architectural systems drive design
An essential underpinning of thematic design is the understanding
that all architecture − local vernacular, everyday buildings and
signature architecture alike − is built on structured combinations
of design principles, rules and building systems. Systems represent
a common wellspring of inspiration of great architecture, for
both signature and thematic buildings. They offer the potential to
reinforce and extend the essential culturally shared character and
quality of good built environment. Bodies of work such as Wright’s
and Le Corbusier’s similarly build upon systems approaches.
6.1 Column syntax. Ministry of Social Welfare and Employment,
Amsterdam (1990). Herman Hertzberger, Architect. Copyrighted
drawing courtesy of the architect
![Page 162: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
153
Use architectural systems to structure, define and articulate building form and varying
spaces within and beyond the building.
Create a variety of
distinct forms and spaces
built upon common systems.
Each remains
fundamentally unique
while obeying similar rules of
combination and
expressing related architectural
identity.
Thematic design relies on systems.
It need not be confined by them.
6 Working with a Primary Architectural System
![Page 163: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
154 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
Chapter 6 explores what systems are, their parts and rules and the generative design
role they play in defining a given architecture.
Individual design methods and objectives vary: Some architecture rejects any
semblance of systematic design or logic in order to project theoretical or sculptural
inspiration, artful accretion of form, material collision, arbitrariness or even whimsy.
Nonetheless, all design is ultimately developed by following a process of systems
evaluation and selection followed by the establishment of orderly, hierarchical and
coherent relationships between parts. Architects therefore compose, communicate
and construct form using combinations of systems.
Over the course of an additive series of partial plays, Play 6 explores the use of systems
to build formal and stylistic character. In the process, the plays reveal, expand upon and
confirm the rules of combination that ultimately define each system, its appropriate
use and architectural capacity. They then begin to shape a unique architecture under
the hands of each player.
Throughout each performance, designers are encouraged to systematize formal
design moves and decisions. Yet it is left to each designer to determine how the inher-
ent strengths and characteristics of selected systems will drive design: Play 6 lends
itself particularly well to furthering your hands-on feel as a designer for how and when
to break the rules.
Defining architectural systems
Systems are predefined sets of elements that are assembled following specific rules
to form complex wholes. In thematically coherent built environment, systems and
subsystems also play an important sociocultural role: They embody shared ideas and
preferred ways of building. That mechanism weaves common understanding into envi-
ronmental fabric.
Architecture tends to be defined by its constructional, stylistic, environmental and clad-
ding systems. Architectural system is an umbrella term that may be applied to any such
ordering system that intentionally and substantially shapes building form. The rules
and elements of such architectural systems may be explicitly defined by legal codes
or manufacturers’ specifications. Or they may be implicit in widely shared cultural prac-
tices and traditions. The term building system variously describes structure, construction,
cladding, environmental controls, utilities or services including communications and
security networks, etc. Whether or not these are “architectural” systems depends on
whether the designer uses them consciously to shape form.
Introduction
![Page 164: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 155
Systems that are defined by code or introduced into the marketplace by manufactur-
ers have well-documented and easily identified parts and rules. By contrast, vernacu-
lar systems start out open-ended and implicit. As increasing numbers of individuals
successfully adopt similar ways of combining similar parts, they may become fixed and
codified over time — as occurred with the North American wood stud framing system.
Vernacular systems otherwise remain defined by social practices and local building
cultures and identified by observation and comparison.
Using and combining systems
Systems jointly build the form, style, structure and image of architecture and regulate
its performance. They also form a basis of common understanding among players who
combine well understood limited selections of elements in agreed upon ways to arrive
at a given result.
No coherent aesthetic vision can be realized without carefully selecting and combining
structural, material and component systems. In projects such as the Barcelona Pavilion
of Mies van Der Rohe or Le Corbusier’s Villas La Roche-Jeanneret and Savoye, poetic
invention is married to rationalized structure, manufacturing and building production.
Architects and builders rely on particular combinations of systems to offer consistently
satisfactory aesthetic and technical design and performance. Placed within electronic
libraries, specifications and performance standards, they allow design teams to call
upon preferred, pretested and previously coordinated combinations of systems, parts,
details, interfaces and scopes of work. The alternative — reinventing, developing, coor-
dinating and field testing unique combinations accompanied by new details, specifica-
tions, scopes of work and erection sequences for each project — would be prohibi-
tively time-consuming while exposing projects to additional risk.
The decisions that underlie the selection of particular combinations of architectural
systems are by no means purely pragmatic: The parts, rules of assembly and compat-
ibilities of each building system imply specific formal character and capabilities.
Systems unite to create open-ended design armatures of architectural character and
possibility. Those frameworks contribute to the underlying spatial, structural, construc-
tional and experiential character of form. They scaffold subsequent intervention as
new systems, formal transformations and environmental players follow.
All systems limit the range of form by specifying particular design methods, elements,
materials and relationships between components. For instance, structural systems
set parameters that directly influence a range of possibilities: height; bay size; fenes-
tration; how members carry or resist loads and support cantilevers; where and how
natural lighting can or cannot be introduced; and the sequence, means and methods
of construction. Secondary and subsystems further fill in the outlines of design, physi-
cally and conceptually.
The 2/3rds rule
Vernacular systems emerge organically over time with
conventional − rather than codified − rules and parts.
Therefore, they exhibit a good deal of variation. This
renders their definition difficult and potentially ambigu-
ous. When environmental forms are observed to exhibit
significant overlap of both certain parts and associated
implicit rules about 2/3rds of the time, that overlap may
be considered to define a system.
![Page 165: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
156 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Architectural styles employ particular system selections in combination to maintain a
similar look and feel across buildings. Often, styles symbolize and embody sociocul-
tural, economic and political meaning. Styles that primarily reflect the aesthetic predi-
lections and values of their designers and/or showcase current trends may or may not
reflect broader cultural values.
Designing with specific systems in mind
System selections and combinations are often ad hoc, tailored to a specific situation
and design intent. For instance, building envelopes vary widely. Depending on the
primary structural system, mid-rise building façades may be composed using store-
front, curtain wall or structural glass wall systems or individual windows. Designers
may decide on either “punched” or “trimmed out“ windows, carefully designing indi-
vidual window sizes and shapes. Or they may opt for curtain walls and detail structure
and attachment accordingly. Aesthetic preferences, design intent and performance
specifications then determine the rhythm, proportion, color, finish, opacity and mullion
and glazing attributes that determine interior and exterior architectural, spatial and
urban character.
Beginning with specific systems already in mind at the start allows ongoing dialogue
between selected systems to inform architectural design while also allowing the
designer to tailor them individually and in combination toward specific aesthetic ends.
In conditions such as a glazed roof bearing upon structure, understanding of the over-
all design, character and details can only progress beyond a rudimentary point by
selecting and understanding specific systems and how to combine them: Does the
glazing frame bear directly upon the structure in a series of point loads, or is an interme-
diary light structure used to transfer those loads? In the latter case, is that intermediary
system a space frame, a series of light steel or laminated wood trusses or a precast
concrete structure? Are the lower walls precast or sitecast concrete? Are they bearing
masonry or prefabricated panels attached to a structural concrete or steel frame?
Ultimately, all architectural systems and subsystems are thematic: They come with
selections of parts and rules that must be consistently adhered to … with occasional
exceptions: Overstepping the boundaries, ignoring normal constraints and/or occa-
sionally introducing foreign elements into the mix is also very much part of the game.
![Page 166: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 157
This sequence of play variations was inspired by a structural and spatial motif found in
two 20th century projects: the Richards Medical Research and Goddard laboratories
by Louis I. Kahn and the Centraal Beheer office building by Herman Hertzberger.
While maintaining certain elements found in those precedents, the play reduces
the essential module/base form from its original institutional size − roughly 900ft²
(100m² ) − to a more residential 144ft² (13.4m² ) small-room-sized scale.
To begin, Play 6a builds over the course of three parts. Part I focuses on initial two-
dimensional exploration of the system, arraying series of modules and their compo-
nent parts in various ways to create a building footprint and site plan. It is a study in
how even simple systems with limited selections of parts can generate a coherent,
well-formed and architecturally interesting plan.
Taking the ground floor / site plan as a point of departure, Part II then introduces the
complete three-dimensional module and its variable kit of parts as a base system.
Players add to and reconfigure the modular base form as necessary and transform the
building and site plan in the process of generating a 3D design.
Part III adds further systems and begins to transform the three-dimensional array of
parts and forms into architecture.
Play 6a sets up an initial exploration of the use of systems. It serves as the basis for two
advanced plays: In 6b, the architectural framework of 6a is transformed by overlaying
it with a style system chosen by the individual player. 6c takes design to the next level,
testing the architecture of the base building and inserting partitioning and further
articulating the plan to illustrate how it will look, feel and function.
Special Topic
Kahn-Hertzberger variations
Introduction
6.2 Module used in Kahn's Richards Laboratory
6.3 Module used in Hertzberger's Centraal Beheer
![Page 167: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
158 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
In the University of Pennsylvania’s Richards Medical Research and Goddard Labora-
tories, Louis Kahn created a series of linked stacks of square column-free labs, each
the size of a small building. The lab modules align along a series of parallel datum lines,
organizing a built field that is highly directional but does not balance form around a
dominant formal axis. In plan, the bilateral reflective symmetry of the individual labs,
their planning grids and perimeter serrations seems almost bastion-like in its inward
focus. In elevation and section, however, Kahn directly builds upon the design of
pioneering architects including Frank Lloyd Wright and Gerritt Rietveld to dissolve
the heavy masonry and bring the surrounding exterior world and sunlight in via open
glazed corners. Borne by slender concrete cantilevers, layer upon layer of the towers
appears to float suspended in the air.
Translating Kahn’s emerging architectural vision into built form required rigorous
research and development related to building systems. It led to the creation of a unique
structural module in which building loads are transferred by a 50ft² (15m²) crisscross
of prefabricated beams shaped like a tic-tac-toe (noughts and crosses) grid. The
analytical drawings by Enric Xercavins i Valls clarify how the double cantilevers at the
corners are supported. The beams step upward, reducing their depth as they approach
the corner, where the bending moment decreases. Beneath that carrying structure,
offset pairs of columns located within the middle third of each perimeter wall carry the
transferred load down at each floor. As a result of this pioneering architectural system,
every corner can be wrapped by 270 degrees of unobstructed light.
Kahn spatially separates the small-building-sized modules that create his floor plan.
Connecting them with slender corridors allows each module in the assembly to read
and function as an independent configuration. Quick visual analysis reveals that Kahn
used a regularly repeating tartan grid as a planning module to guide the placement
of building elements. He then aligned the fields to create a strong primary direction.
To what extent did Louis Kahn’s vision drive the system? To what extent did the archi-
tecture draw inspiration from the inherent form-defining character and possibilities of its
structural system? At a certain point, such distinctions had become meaningless: In the
final building, the vision and the system it spawned had grown inseparable.
6.5 Step-by-step assembly of the kit of parts to
form a three-dimensional module. Copyrighted
drawings by Mark Oberholzer and Philip Baraldi,
courtesy of Mark Oberholzer
6.4 Exterior. Photo © Michael E. Reali Jr., courtesy of the
photographer
Special Topic
Kahn-Hertzberger variations
Richards Medical Research and Goddard Laboratories Philadelphia (1965) Louis I. Kahn, Architect
![Page 168: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 159
6.7 Ground Floor Plan. Copyrighted drawing from
the Louis I. Kahn Collection, The University of
Pennsylvania and the Pennsylvania Historical and
Museum Commission, reprinted with permission
6.6 Axonometric of prefabricated structural system
with key details. Drawings © 2003 Enric Xercavins i
Valls from “La prefabricación en edificios singulares,”
courtesy of the author
4 3
2
3
2
4
2
2
![Page 169: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
160 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Kahn’s revolutionary design was followed several years later by Herman Hertzberger’s
Centraal Beheer office building. The primary module looks strikingly similar in diagram-
matic plan drawings. However, differences in dimensions, rules of assembly, materials,
aesthetics, massing and spatial character add up to a very different architecture.
Both Kahn and Hertzberger establish directional fields with parallel series of demar-
cations (datum lines) rather than formal axes. But while Kahn’s plan is fundamentally
linear, Hertzberger’s is non-directional. While Kahn extrudes the ground floor building
footprint upward to create a highly articulated tower, Hertzberger aggregates modules
entrepreneurially in three dimensions. The result is a visually complex non-directional
multi-story spatial field that measures 10 modules by 10 modules on the ground and
ranges from 1 to 5 stories in height. Within the highly articulated interior space of
the three-dimensional built field, spaces for designated uses alternate with multiple
height openings. Those voids allow light to penetrate down into the building. They
create views that sometimes focus beyond the exterior and at other times visually link
successive spaces and passageways.
Hertzberger, like Kahn, uses a tartan grid as an ordering device. In this case, the zones
locate the 30' (10m) modules, while the margins accommodate interior bridges and
general circulation and also function as lanterns lit by the glazed roofs.
As in the previous example, the primary building system in Centraal Beheer is at once
structural, material, geometrical, spatial and aesthetic.
6.8 Interior. Copyrighted photo by Willem Diepraam,
courtesy of the architect
6.9 Interior. Copyrighted photo by Jan Derwig, courtesy
of the architect
Special Topic
Kahn-Hertzberger variations
Centraal Beheer Apeldoorn, Netherlands (1972) Herman Hertzberger, Architect
![Page 170: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 161
6.11 A basic kit of parts of five plan elements –
window, glass block and opaque corners,
niche walls and columns – is freely combined
to articulate space and fine-tune visual
and acoustic screening, closure, openness,
indirect light, opacity, etc.
6.12 Plan. Copyrighted drawing courtesy of the architect
6.10 Herzberger’s module. Traditional load-
bearing masonry wall systems place punched
openings away from the corners. Glazed
corners are achieved by shifting the load-
bearing elements toward the center third of the
perimeter walls while resisting shear with the
carrying structure. An aggregation of four
modules defines a three-dimensional vertical
space reserved for light and circulation.
20 m20
![Page 171: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
162 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Play 6a − Part I
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations
Design the Ground Floor and Site Plan
RULES OF PLAY
Base form
Use the Single Base Module as your base form.
Define material components
Define the material of the system. (Precast concrete is suggested, particularly the first
time around.)
Define the site
Designing both the building form and the site is crucial to this play. In Part I, maintain
a simple flat site. Feel free to work within additional contextual constraints, such as
placing your site within a particular characteristic urban fabric.
Additional elements
The columns and walls that compose the base module may also be used indepen-
dently to build site definition. Site walls may be extruded to any length.
Freely superimpose and combine like elements when merging modules
Columns and walls have sufficient bearing capacity to support parts of several abutting
modules. They may therefore be shared when mirroring or otherwise joining modules.
End result
At the close of Part I, your final form should present the footprint of your building,
together with site definition.
Record the rules
Record the final plan and also the explicit or implicit rules of combination that govern
form-making within the system.
12' × 12' (3.7m × 3.7m) Single Base Module
![Page 172: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
PLAY 6A − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART I 163
STRATEGIES
Explore the configuration’s capacities and limitations in plan
Explore the endless series of flexible building forms and interior compositions that can
be generated by arraying single base modules and recombining them. Note that despite
its architectural specificity, the module allows for an infinite range of possibilities.
Try on a different perspective
Freedom to move in new directions is frequently gained by seeing what is firmly in
place in a different light − perhaps by redefining component configurations or even
flipping or inverting the design to view it from an entirely different angle.
BEAR IN MIND
Trust the system
Trust in architectural systems – or in arriving at favorable design outcomes via open-
ended processes – does not always come easily. Nonetheless, entering into dialogue
with form requires trusting in incremental development and understanding that rich and
elaborate configurations can grow from stepwise series of small open-ended moves.
Anticipate subsequent development
With each move, try to anticipate and evaluate multiple alternatives for subsequent
moves. In laying out your form as an initial framework for subsequent design, try to
anticipate how alternative moves will influence the developing architecture overall,
throughout Play 6a and beyond.
Directional and non-directional fields
There are two primary ways to array systems horizontally as you generate a built field:
Directional fields reinforce a primary direction. Their zones and margins tend to run in
parallel, with no limit to the number or length of zones. Movement in secondary direc-
tions will differ in character and articulation in ways that can be readily organized and
reinforced by the zoning system.
Non-directional fields extend simultaneously along two or more directions, with no
dominant direction as form grows by accretion. Otherwise, in the special case of non-
thematic non-directional fields such as churches, temples or buildings such as Andrea
Palladio’s Villa Rotonda, it may embody strict reflective symmetry across multiple axes.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 173: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
164 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Converting the original square module (M0) into a double module (M1) creates direc-
tional form. Adding perimeter walls (M4) to enclose the design transforms the exterior
into figural and positive designed space instead of remnant leftover space … a design
strategy whose notable precedents include Ludwig Mies Van der Rohe’s Patio Houses.
Sample Play 6.1
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations
Part I: two-dimensional exploration
M0 Single base module M1 Mirroring the single base module,
removing interior T-shaped columns and
replacing them with round columns at
the perimeter creates a double module.
M2 A nominal 4' × 4' (1.2m × 1.2m) tartan
planning grid of zones surrounded by
margins is set. Two additional double
modules are placed parallel to the first.
![Page 174: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 6.1 − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART I 165
6.13 Patio House Project (1931−8). Ludwig Mies Van der
Rohe, Architect. Drawing © 2013 Andrés Mignucci,
based on drawing by the architect
M3 A covered gallery with one lateral
extension unifies the modules and
provides a principal circulation spine.
M4 A territorial perimeter wall further
defines a series of interconnected
courtyards and gardens.
M5 The courtyards and gardens are paved
and planted.
![Page 175: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
166 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Play 6a − Part II
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations
Three-Dimensional Exploration
Base system modules and elements
Building Modules:
Single Base Module: 12' × 12' (3.7m × 3.7m)
Double Module: 12' × 24' (3.7m × 7.4m)
Niche wall
Columns
Plan Sections showing roof elements6"(1
5cm
),
10'-6
"(3
.15
m)
9'(
2.7
m)
9'(
2.7m
)6"
(15
cm)
l'(3
0cm
i
4'
1.2m
12'(
3.6m
)
4'
1.2m
4'
1.2m
9'(
2.7
m)
6'-3
"(1
.9m
)
N~
3
rq (;)
N~
en3
2-
N~
3
4'(
102m
)
6'-6
"(2
m)
CIl ~ g'
18"
(45c
m)
2. CIl ~ g' 318
"(4
5cm
)-CIl ~ g' 2.
![Page 176: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
PLAY 6A − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART II 167
RULES OF PLAY
Start with the site
Start with the site plan you generated in Part I.
Build the 3rd dimension
Array the various parts to build 3D space based on the 2D plan.
Slope the site
Next, introduce a sloping ground profile and transform your building to adjust to it.
Assess the system’s capacity to adapt to various site changes.
Make additional sectional adjustments on the fly
As you play, freely adjust the site plan to compress or expand the height of interior
spaces and introduce level changes in the ground form.
Modules
• Single and double base modules may be aggregated in any way, as long as they
follow the modules’ geometry and are buildable.
Columns and beams
• Any of the three column shapes − T-shaped, cruciform and round − may be used at
any time.
• Columns and beams can be used outside the module to form porticos, balconies,
canopies, colonnades and other architectural features.
Niche walls
• Niche walls can be placed anywhere along the building perimeter, except at corner
bays.
• They can also subdivide space … but as a rule only under the beam lines.
• Exception: They may also be placed in the middle of the central bay of modules.
Roofs
• The flat roof can be stacked or used for roof terraces.
• The vaulted roof is intended for use with the double module.
6.14 Roof vaults. Sangath, Ahmedabad, India (1981)
Balkrishna V. Doshi, Architect. Photo © Aga Khan
Award for Architecture /St. Anne, Joseph N.
![Page 177: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
168 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
STRATEGIES
Start by making the kit of parts
This hands-on three-dimensional design performance requires ready access to all parts.
Model them in advance, either physically or digitally, based on your available resources,
preferred working method and media.
Explore the system
Explore the capacities and limits of the system’s components and how they interact.
Take advantage of the freedom inherent in partial transformation
Within larger configurations, identify smaller parts to independently manipulate. Observe
as you elaborate or act upon only one part while keeping others constant.
When changing the kit of parts seems necessary …
Maintain the basic elements of play. Starting with the least important elements first,
evaluate thematic variations. Component parts that combine to assemble each part–
whole configuration element can also be switched. For example: Before abandoning the
use of columns, consider changes to their profile, material properties and construction,
base, capital and bearing details.
What is already in place should inform what follows
Introducing non-thematic elements into everyday environmental fabric is a significant
act: It should be undertaken neither arbitrarily nor capriciously. Just as historic churches
incorporated dimensions, architectural systems, materials, details, surface treatments
and styles from surrounding built environment and fit in as if they were inevitable, in
successful thematic transformations, new forms ideally evolve out of what has already
been created.
Willingly suspend disbelief
The poet Samuel Taylor Coleridge described the necessary willing suspension of
disbelief that allows the narrative of fiction to succeed. So, too, with form: In creative
dialogue with emergent form, it is essential to listen to what various themes might have
in store rather than willfully imposing a solution. One mark of a skilled designer is the
ability to quickly and intuitively identify several potential ways to move forward. Equally
important is foresight in weighing options and selecting directions that will continue to
open up further possibilities.
Add a non-thematic element Try enhancing the whole by adding a one-time special
feature: a carefully selected “non-thematic” configuration that markedly deviates from
the system’s parts and rules.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 178: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 169
BEAR IN MIND
A single system is rarely sufficient
Building design brings numerous systems into play. Each subsequent system adds
richness and completeness. No single system is – or should attempt to be – sufficient
to encompass a complete and rich design. Don’t design and articulate an entire build-
ing using only the provided kit of parts!
Use building planning tools to position uses and elements
Utilize zones, margins, modules and grids to define relationships between physical
elements and create a framework for positioning them.
Keep relations constant
Thematic transformation builds upon established relations between parts. Their rela-
tive positions tend to remain constant. Examples: When an arch is substituted for
a lintel, its placement remains constant relative to supporting elements. Inserting a
column base between column and floor rarely offsets or displaces the column. Game-
changing alteration of such fundamental thematic relationships arguably marks the
beginning of a new and different play.
Systems outcomes are open-ended
Particular systems and their kits of parts often anticipate and favor particular design
approaches, forms or styles. However, all thematic systems allow for enormous variety.
They neither prescribe outcomes nor provide recipes for specific final forms.
Every system has limits
The inherent selections and exclusions of each system carry formal implications and
limitations. Each system precludes certain architectural directions and limits a build-
ing’s capacity to accommodate certain uses in ways that may become obvious only as
design progresses.
Break your own rules
Once the parts of the system have been arrayed in strict accordance with the place-
ment rules, observe how intentional deviation from thematic principles — creating
unique space that varies from the norm in size, span, shape or materiality — may offer
incidental advantage and/or design counterpoint and may require the introduction of
out-of-system elements.
Don’t get lost in play
Taking the opportunity to explore the limits and capacities of the system is every bit
as important as demonstrating how skillfully you can array and stack the elements to
craft architectural form.
![Page 179: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
170 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
This axonometric sample play is roughly based on the kit of parts of Play 6a − Part II,
with the notable absence of vaulted roofs. The play breaks down into three succes-
sive explorations: M0−M6 explores the base system’s digital kit of parts and how to
build the sorts of principle structures previously depicted in plan in Sample Play 6.1. In
M7−M8, the plan from Part I is built up into three dimensions. M9−M11 then begins to
transform and articulate the design laid out by the kit of parts framework: It introduces
a series of ground form level changes, increases the height and hierarchical impor-
tance of the central module and begins to explore a roofing system.
The presentation approach is effective and efficient. It makes no attempt at elegant
depiction of the design. Nonetheless, the sequence of images as a whole carefully
introduces and explores the pieces and how they come together. That said, particular
strategies for combining prefabrication and site fabrication and how individual parts
of the various walls and the perimeter beams come together and attach to the rest
of the system seem inadequately explored. Because this is an abstract digital repre-
sentation and not a physical model, it was easy to depict the totally unsupported roof
grid positioned in three-dimensional space. Omitting the sequential move of placing
the perimeter beam and allowing the grid to visually float unsupported for a series of
moves is ill-advised, particularly since the kit of parts provides no hint regarding how
the perimeter beam is assembled or manufactured.
At the conclusion of Part II, we have completed a substantial exploration and visualiza-
tion of the kit of parts, the rules that govern assembly and also of the three-dimensional
possibilities of the forms, relationships and sophisticated design strategies proposed
in Part I. The end result may be viewed as a framework or armature for succeeding
steps that would actually create and articulate an architecture.
Sample Play 6.2
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations
Part II: three-dimensional exploration
M0 AXONOMETRIC KIT OF PARTS
• Prefabricated structural elements: piers, columns, roof grids and
perimeter beam (sample corner section shown)
• Sitecast elements: low and high walls (small sample low pier shown)
• A grid square of 7×7 units
![Page 180: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 6.2 − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART II 171
M1 The basic building unit is expanded by adding modules to the roof
grid. Intermediate perimeter columns are introduced below the
midpoint of the roof grid alignment. They are round, signaling that they
will not form corners.
M2 A double module is introduced.
M3 The defining characteristics of this system-based architecture are now
present: open corners, double modules, several alternative varieties of
structural columns and a gridded flat roof structure assembled on a 4'
(1.2m) square planning grid.
M4 The roof grid is transformed by enlarging the principal square at each
of its four corners. As a result, the open corners persist; however, they
have shifted and become less dominant.
![Page 181: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
172 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
M5 Combining multiple grid squares sets the stage for designing a larger
and more complex field.
M6 Three double modules are placed upon the expanded grid.
M7 Arrays of exterior columns link the three modules. M8 The addition of perimeter walls transforms the leftover open space to
a bounded figural and spatially defined entity. It unifies a compound
of courtyards juxtaposed with building modules.
![Page 182: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 6.2 − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART II 173
M9 The ground form is articulated by a series of level changes. M10 The roof of the central module and its hierarchical importance
are raised.
M11 A roofing system is added.
![Page 183: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
174 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Part III builds directly upon Part II. It begins to add secondary systems as it translates
the diagrammatic model of the building compound into architecture. No additional
base forms, base system components or strategies are specified.
RULES OF PLAY
It’s your move
Each designer at this point must follow his or her own preferred path, technique and
rules in transforming the diagram and projecting the beginning of an emerging evoca-
tive architecture.
Make it explicit
Each addition you make to the existing systematic framework requires both a selec-
tion of parts and a set of rules to be fully comprehensible. Document any additional
rules, parts, objectives and forms sufficiently for another designer to both understand
and take over and continue play at any point.
Media
Representation may include any mix of drawings, photographs, digital or physical
models and written vignettes.
Play 6a − Part III
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations
Projecting an Architecture
BEAR IN MIND
Continue to design thematically
Although one singular strong formal move may seem to give the design increased char-
acter and strong focus, it is important to focus on thematic design in ways that can be
expanded systematically.
Evoke a building / don’t produce one
The idea of this proof of concept is not to design an entire building, but to develop central
ideas, approaches and vignettes that point toward a subsequent architecture. Stop when
you feel you have adequately illustrated the design direction, its look and feel.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 184: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAYS 6.3 AND 6.4 − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART III 175
Architecture builds upon far more than skillfully composed primary systems. The initial
forms we create provide a framework for articulation. They must build a sense of hier-
archy, flow, character, presence, style, materiality, relative closure vs. permeability,
openness vs. privacy, etc. And their structure must remain open to the incorporation of
complex environmental qualities in response to the needs and preferences of owners,
inhabitants and the future.
In the follow-up to Part II: 3D Exploration, two distinct approaches to developing an
architecture based on a diagrammatic framework — and two profoundly different
aesthetics — emerge in the quick sketch exercises of Sample Plays 6.3 and 6.4.
Sample Play 6.3 is a fairly direct and literal extension of M11, with further expan-
sion of the system and thematic exploration of its capacity. Employing the same quick
axonometric sketch technique, it appropriates and expands the depicted form-making
system and underlying design principles as well as the physical size of the site and
building complex. It expands the initial kit of parts and adds supplementary systems
such as visual screens of varying opacity. It also introduces a new series of roof forms
and an expanded series of ground plane moves and standardizes two new formal
motifs: Standardized square flat-roofed pavilions — both single- and double-height —
are arrayed throughout the built field, either as autonomous forms or branching off
from the linear array of bays. Within the walled and partially sunken complex, the exte-
rior walls and passages of the interconnected main building are now entirely enclosed.
Sample Plays 6.3 and 6.4
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations
Part III: projecting an architecture
Sample Play 6.3: Articulated architectural form based
on M11
![Page 185: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
176 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Street elevation of the compound, showing
three modules along the perimeter wall
Longitudinal section through compound
Front elevation of module Side elevation of module
Sample Play 6.4
![Page 186: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAYS 6.3 AND 6.4 − KAHN-HERTZBERGER VARIATIONS, PART III 177
Sample Play 6.4 adopts a fundamentally different approach. It is less about exploring
a system and its limits and more about understanding how to start with a system and
end up with a convincing and evocative urban architecture. Its exploration focuses on
the human experience of architecture and urban design and how — even in abstract
and diagrammatic form — complex and coherent built fields can evolve out of small-
scale design decisions.
Building upon M11, the designer shifts gears, explores a small piece of the walled
compound and articulates an architecture in a combination of drawings: a longitudinal
section/elevation, elevation drawings of a case study module and a street elevation
that projects a series of façades in theme and variation. The goal is to explore simulta-
neously the emerging spatial and aesthetic character of the whole compound and of
its individual parts. The street elevation suggests an additive approach to urban design.
It is, in essence, a quick exploration of starting with a base building module and building
a large aggregate collective form.
As is often the case when walled communities and compounds are observed from
outside the wall, we perceive little of the urban or sectional organization of the built
field behind the wall. At the same time, we have a clear idea of the urban face, scale
and character of the design and the rhythm of entries. At the architectural scale, we
see an emerging exterior kit of parts, where and how elements are set within the
façades and how they look and feel as an ensemble. Perhaps in counterpoint to the
plan, the urban face of the project introduces strong compositional balance, in which
the reflective symmetry of the central 1- or 2-story module is counterbalanced by
the placement of secondary add-on façade elements, entryways and the carefully
composed massing and dimensions of the perimeter walls.
In evolving two profoundly different architectures out of a common diagrammatic
model, Sample Plays 6.3 and 6.4 demonstrate the versatility inherent in working with
an architectural system − particularly when its elements are assembled with rigor,
geometric discipline and a sense of exploration, invention … and play.
The street elevation in Sample Play 6.4 hints at a further question about extending
building design to the urban level:
What similar themes, common elements and rules are crucial to coherence when devel-
oping a collection of varied buildings along a block?
![Page 187: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
178 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
In selecting architectural systems, it is useful to think in terms of stereotomic and
tectonic properties.
Combining systems that tend toward heavy, solid, cave-like earth- and gravity-bound
form with tensile upward-reaching open light-filled frameworks expresses the primal
opposition of sticks and stones. It touches on the tension between our deeply rooted
sense of gravity and attempts to tower above it.
The joining of stereotomic and tectonic systems often takes on phenomenological,
metaphorical, cosmological and/or poetic significance: Buildings root in the solid
ground and trunk and branches extend upward as they reach for the heavens. In so
doing, they provide objective correlatives for various accompanying states of mind.
They unite the protection of cave dwellings or Le Corbusier’s underground chapel
at Sainte-Marie de la Tourette with the light and open frameworks of E. Fay Jones’s
Thorncrown Chapel or Jean Nouvel’s Institut du Monde Arab.
Special Topic
Tectonic and stereotomic families of form
One tends toward the light and the
other toward dark. These gravitational
opposites may be said to symbolize the
two cosmological opposites to which
they aspire; the sky and the earth.
− Kenneth Frampton
6.15 The cave. The archetypal stereotomic form.
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
6.16 The house as cave. Setenil, Spain. Photo ©
1983 Andrés Mignucci
6.17 The cave reinterpreted. Casa Poli,
Península de Coliumo, Chile (2005). Pezo von
Ellrichshausen Architects. Copyrighted photo
by Cristobal Palma, courtesy of the architect
![Page 188: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 179
6.20 The tree rejoins the forest. Thorncrown Chapel.
Eureka Springs, Arkansas (1980). E. Fay Jones,
Architect. Photo © 1998 Jonathan Teicher
While stereotomic and tectonic building systems may be used independently, they are
commonly paired, as when wood or steel framing rests upon a stone, concrete or block
foundation. The less similar the fundamental character of the juxtaposed systems, the
more likely that associated properties such as containment, lightness, openness, etc. will
strongly contrast, in ways that may assume broad architectural significance.
In cave-like forms, beams of direct natural light are framed by openings, with gradations
of secondary indirect light shaped by wall and ceiling surfaces. In contrast, the varying
thickness and density of branching elements creates diffuse non-directional filtered light
within tectonic frameworks. Combining these families of form contrasts the earthbound,
the heavy and immovable against the lightweight, sheltering and sky-directed; the rock in
contrast to the tree; the dark and secluded space against the light and outreaching form.
6.18 The tree. The archetypal tectonic form.
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
6.19 The tree trunk as column. Photo © Silvia
La Ferrara, courtesy of the photographer
![Page 189: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
180 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
The highly structured stereotomic form of southern Europe’s hilltowns is fine-grained
and complex. Each town is the product of a long-term build-up of fairly simple and
systematic moves that have occurred continuously throughout the aggregate form.
The recognizable character and coherence of each place results from consistently
integrating vernacular systems and patterns at many dimensional scales and times.
Within each town, series of similar acts have evolved over time into fundamental
patterns in theme and variation. Long slender streets wind along contours. They follow
the large-scale landscape direction and adjust to accommodate local site features.
Lots are laid out to accommodate houses of a prevalent local type and an anticipated
range of uses. Streets build up gradually by accretion and are eventually lined with an
unbroken wall of building fronts. As they wind along the contours of the steeply sloped
site, they collectively form a continuous wall, a quasi-urban infrastructure. Building with
similar systems and patterns yields similarity and continuity.
6.21 Whitewashed aggregate form rising above
foothills. Casares, Spain. A renowned white village
of the Mediterranean
6.22 Low-lying forms along switchbacking streets
carve into a rock escarpment. Montefrío,
Spain. A Moorish castle crowns the hilltop
Special Topic
Vernacular systems
Southern European hilltowns
![Page 190: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 181
At the same time, individual building forms freely adjust both to local site conditions
and to the larger topography, geology, views and range of use of the whole. Cease-
less variation results from the build-up of countless fine-grained decisions and unique
adjustments that produce each individual entry sequence and form. Those changes
result in variations in size, structural system, bay size, dimensional system, surface
materials, finishes, color palette and placement of fenestration. They reflect differ-
ences in site; topography; owner, builder and user preferences; and changes in mate-
rial, systems, uses and local culture over time. Much of the uniqueness of each building
site can also be ascribed to overlap, adjustment, compromise or patterns of interfer-
ence between myriad systems or form making on different scales, as when streets,
houses, arches, planes or material surfaces meet in unanticipated ways. The rest is
attributable to human nature.
In sum: Each hilltown building is unique. Yet in theme and variation, the buildings follow
certain key rules that govern room and building size, window alignment and position-
ing, symmetry, story heights, etc. While each building is created and maintained inde-
pendently, it is their collective form that tends to be recognized.
Copyrighted photos 6.21−6.23 by Maurice K. Smith from
the Intrinsic Attributes of Built Form Assemblage special
library collection of MIT Dome digitized content, courtesy
of the photographer
6.23 Built form moves up and over the hill. Gordes,
France was colonized by Celts, Romans and
subsequently by artists including Marc Chagall and
Victor Vasarely
![Page 191: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
182 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Just as stone buildings in southern European hilltowns vary significantly from place to
place, traditional vernacular systems for building wooden houses in Japan also vary
regionally. In all cases, the rules of construction subsume a broad range of considerations.
Conventional wood building systems such as North American stud wall framing are
generally concealed and considered to be devoid of stylistic or value-laden meaning.
They limit form based only on code, practical or technical bases. Such is not the case
in traditional Japanese vernacular architecture: Here, each bit of joinery participates in
any one of a number of builderly and aesthetic traditions and the basic nominal 2'-11"
(90cm) dimensional module of the tatami mat width carries a great deal of association.
Historically, the overall size of a given room − measured in tatami mats − has implied a
specific range of dimensions and three-dimensional proportions.
Special Topic
Vernacular systems
Traditional Japanese architecture
6.24 Restored Edo Period (1600 –1868) rowhouse
storefront. Hida Takayama, Japan. Copyrighted
photo by Jonathan Teicher
6.25 Yoshijima House sake brewery. Hida Takayama,
Japan (1908). Nishida Isaburo, master carpenter /
builder. Copyrighted photo by Timothy M. Ciccone,
courtesy of the photographer
![Page 192: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 183
6.28 A surprisingly fluid solution allows rooms to align.
When a 5-tatami-wide space abuts two smaller
rooms with five tatamis plus an intermediary wall, the
end walls should be displaced by the width of the
partition. To avoid misalignment, the module itself
adjusts: The room incorporates some tatami mats
that are either wider or more slender, depending
on local preference. Drawing © 1998 N. John
Habraken, from The Structure of the Ordinary
6.27 Measured drawing of a traditional teahouse
plan in the sukiya style
6.26 Traditional Japanese house roof framing systems
Drawings 6.26, 6.27 © 1964 Heinrich Engel from
The Japanese House: A Tradition for Contemporary
Architecture, courtesy of Rose Engel
Design principles and selections in classical Japanese house forms frequently embody
social hierarchy, cultural history and geomancy as well as local building culture. They
often determine building size and mode of assembly, orientation, modular and propor-
tional design, detailing, joinery, ornament and placement and porosity of screens. The
resulting form embodies a coherent aesthetic, sociocultural, phenomenological and
practical worldview.
The structure of many Japanese building types is based on conventional plans. Each
individual framing structure can therefore be described in simple carpenters’ diagrams.
Traditionally, these have been left in the rafters to guide future generations of carpenters
as buildings grow and change over time.
![Page 193: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
184 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
As a reigning non-thematic architectural system over the course of more than 2500
years, classicism offers an unparalleled example of cyclical transformation of a system.
Initially, the system codifies and makes explicit ways of building that are intimately
linked with local materials. As the system spreads and the locus of building, associated
materials and technologies change, the system may become dematerialized and find
new expression more appropriate to local building.
Classical architecture debuted in the 6th century bc in Paestum and elsewhere. The
evolving regional Doric, Ionic, Tuscan, Composite and Corinthian orders each took
into account the structural properties and workability of local stone using available
technologies while also incorporating local varieties of religious, cultural and aesthetic
expression via proportion, spacing, quantity, entasis and designated ornament.
Early Greek temples also embodied an inherent and unresolvable tension between
ideal form and execution: Columns were intended to stretch heavenward as continu-
ous slender tree forms, but technological limitations led builders to assemble them by
stacking and carving solid drums of stone. While temples sought to be eternal, bronze
age tools would only permit the quarrying and carving of relatively soft and porous
materials.
As regional ways of non-thematic building were appropriated, they became more
abstract, disassociated from their original materials. Classical architecture traveled
with conquering armies, embodying the hegemony of rising Bronze Age city-states
over their colonies. Subsequently, Rome became the standard-bearer for classicism
and built form edged further away from direct expression of material. For the first time,
the widespread introduction of iron age technologies permitted the quarrying, cutting,
shaping and transporting of massive blocks of timeless granite. Nonetheless, effi-
ciently and economically cladding thick composite walls of concrete, brick and rubble
in granite only where visible proved irresistible.
A thousand years after the height of the Roman Empire, classical architecture was “redis-
covered.” When France overran northern Italy, the classically inspired Renaissance archi-
tecture of Leonardo da Vinci in Florence, Sebastiano Serlio in Rome, Andrea Palladio
and Vincenzo Scamozzi in Vicenza and Venice again traveled with conquering armies.
Special Topic
Evolution of systems
Classical, neo-classical and related styles
6.29 Systemic variations of bases and Ionic capitals
from Isaac Ware’s A complete body of architecture:
adorned with plans and elevations, from original
designs
![Page 194: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 185
Palladio’s The Four Books of Architecture combined woodcuts of measured draw-
ings of monumental Roman-era buildings with his own classically inspired work. In the
wealthy mercantile Renaissance-era Veneto of Palladio, the glory of classical columns
was often cost-effectively reproduced in brick covered in marbleized plaster. His work
became influential and widely translated.
For centuries, Palladianism − and subsequently post-Enlightenment neo-classicism −
traveled via networks of the educated European elite and continued to spread through-
out the world, where they continued to be assimilated and reinterpreted according to
local building culture. For instance, fluted columns and classical porticos were quickly
grafted onto local vernacular building types to establish “Greek revival” architecture
throughout 18th and early 19th century Northern Europe and North America. Hollow
wooden millwork columns required no bases and often eliminated them. In the late
19th century, decorative columns began to appear as cast iron. In the late 20th century,
non-structural columns had progressed to molded fiberglass.
6.30 The Pantheon. Rome (ca. ad 126). Often
attributed to Apollodorus of Damascus.
Drawing from Monumenti di Fabbriche
Antiche by Giovanni Battista Cipriani
6.31 Il Redentore. Venice (1577). Andrea
Palladio, Architect. Photo © 2013 Wolfgang
M.A. Moroder, reprinted with permission of
the photographer
6.32 Krier House. Seaside, Florida (1989). Leon Krier,
Architect. Copyrighted photo by Steven Brooke
from Leon Krier: Architecture and Urban Design
1967–1992, courtesy of Leon Krier
6.33 Villa Capra (Rotonda). Vicenza, Italy (ca. 1570)
Andrea Palladio, Architect. Copyrighted photo
with permission of Edwin Smith / RIBA Library
Photographs Collection
![Page 195: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
186 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Frank Lloyd Wright’s unique and far-ranging body of “organic” architecture continues
to have lasting stylistic and philosophical influence worldwide.
During certain key periods, Wright produced large numbers of freestanding resi-
dences linked by particularly strong thematic character. Those individual collections
of homes in theme and variation − notably his early period Prairie School, American
System-Built, Usonian, Californian and Desert Southwest homes − often combined
particular building systems, spatial progressions, uses of light, surface textures, details
and use of figural motifs. Their combined coherence and beauty ultimately led them
to be expressed in a number of distinct emerging regional vernacular styles and ways
of building.
Wright’s work spanned three-quarters of a century. As it spread throughout the world,
it also incorporated profound industrial shifts from orthogonal building in traditional
natural materials to reliance on concrete, glass, aluminum and steel and the incor-
poration of electricity, elevators and environmental control systems into buildings of
unprecedented geometry. His ability to maintain stylistic coherence over so large a
body of work relied on ironclad systematic application of the principles of the internally
consistent formal rules that traveled with his unique formal system.
That consistent systematic quality, present from the very beginning, added aesthetic
depth to Wright’s architecture. No less important, it allowed him to convey the formal
principles of his work to his dedicated band of followers and made it possible for
disciples as diverse as Richard Neutra, Rudolph Schindler, E. Fay Jones and Paolo
Soleri to sketch, detail and oversee construction of his singular, intricate and rigorously
consistent projects. Wright’s design principles and motifs were rigorously applied by
the architect and his apprentices to multiple scales, to buildings, interiors, fixtures,
furnishings, dinner plates and even stationery. On at least one occasion, Wright was
so overcommitted that he delegated primary responsibility to a trusted disciple with an
admonition to “make it look like a Frank Lloyd Wright building.” Nothing in that charge
was particularly open-ended or ambiguous.
Eventually, Wright’s systems approach, preferred systems, details and design motifs
were translated and exported around the world.
Special Topic
Frank Lloyd Wright’s systems
6.34 Exterior photo. Herbert and Katherine Jacobs
House 1, Madison, Wisconsin (1936). Frank
Lloyd Wright, Architect. Copyrighted photo by J. D.
Steakley, courtesy of the photographer
![Page 196: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 187
6.35 Living rooms with bedroom wing visible beyond. Pope-Leighey
House, Alexandria, Virginia (1941). Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect.
Library of Congress, Prints & Photographs Division, HABS,
Reproduction number HABS VA,30-FALCH,2−1
6.37 Partial street elevation. Darwin D. Martin House. Buffalo, NY (1905).
Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect. Library of Congress, Prints & Photographs
Division. Photo (1965) by Jack E. Boucher, HABS, Reproduction
number HABS NY,15-BUF,5−3
6.36 Plan. Pope-Leighey House, Alexandria, Virginia (1941).
Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect. Library of Congress, Prints &
Photographs Division, HABS, Reproduction number HABS
VA,30-FALCH,2—002
6.38 Site and main floor plan. Darwin D. Martin House. Buffalo, NY (1905).
Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect. From Ausgeführte Bauten und Entwürfe
von Frank Lloyd Wright [The Wasmuth Portfolio]
![Page 197: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
188 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Antonio Gaudí has long been renowned for his extraordinary and wildly idiosyncratic
handling of façades, roofscape, sculptural detailing and surface treatments. Projects like
Casa Milà celebrate the resulting tension between the building and its vernacular context.
Careful observation of Gaudí’s masterful Casa Milà further reveals how the architect
painstakingly follows the urbanistic rules laid out for Barcelona’s Eixample (the 19th
century extension created by Ildefons Cerdà i Sunyer). Its overall massing, story and
window heights, primary cladding materials, use of projecting bays and decorative rail-
ings also build thematic consistency with its contextual surroundings.
Equally important is the building’s unseen selection of technical systems. In particular,
its early adoption of steel frame structure and of a curtain wall system to create a self-
supporting façade was highly innovative … if not revolutionary.
In sum, the building is at once both powerfully thematic and non-thematic. Straddling the
two worlds allows it to contribute to the larger whole of the context in which it stands. That
setting in turn enriches Casa Milà’s singular architecture.
Special Topic
Incorporating industrialized systems
Casa Milà (La Pedrera) Barcelona, 1905 Antonio Gaudí, Architect
![Page 198: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 189
6.40, 6.41 Exterior Views. Photos © 2008 by
Andrés Mignucci
6.39 Casa Milà in urban context, Cerdá’s
Eixample district, Barcelona. Casa Milà, at
the center of the photo, is recognizable for
the distinctive curvilinear forms of its façade
and the elliptical voids carved out of its core.
Aerial photo © 2013 Google Image/ Institut
Cartogràfic de Catalunya
![Page 199: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
190 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
By the 1920s, profound and growing disconnects between the traditional forms and
appearances of buildings and ongoing radical shifts in the organization and produc-
tion of built environment were apparent. Local materials assembled onsite had long
defined vernacular built environment. By now, there was often little or no connec-
tion between how buildings presented inside and outside and their actual construc-
tion based on factory produced systems and materials. For many architects, finding
authentic stylistic expression for architecture based on industrialized systems produc-
tion became a leading quest.
6.42, 6.43 Views from the street and within the multi-
story salon
Copyrighted photos by Georg S. Rotne from Da Verden var
Ung: Modernisme og industriel arkitektur i Frankrig, courtesy of
Royal Danish Academy of Fine Arts, Schools of Architecture,
Design and Conservation and the photographer
Special Topic
Incorporating industrialized systems
Maison de Verre (Maison D’Alsace) Paris, France (1932) Pierre Chareau, Bernard Bijvoet and Louis Dalbet
![Page 200: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 191
Four years after Rietveld attached his concrete, glass and steel Schröder House
(1924) at the end of a row of thoroughly conventional brick bourgeois suburban
rowhouses in Utrecht (Netherlands), and while Le Corbusier was designing the exur-
ban Villa Savoye, the French interior architect Pierre Chareau set off in a different
direction, creating the Maison de Verre (Glass House), working in close collaboration
with Dutch architect Bernard Bijvoet and French metal craft worker Louis Dalbet.
There were notable similarities between Chareau’s project and Rietveld’s: Interior parti-
tioning was dynamic, adjusted by sliding and pivoting screens and doors. Chareau’s
aesthetic similarly celebrated painted steel columns with exposed rivets, industrial
glazing systems, glass block room dividers, rubber floor tiles, perforated metal screens,
exposed piping and conduit. The details he and his co-designers perfected showcased
20th century building systems, transforming them into decorative elements with rhythms,
patterns and geometries that were heavily influenced by classical Japanese architecture.
By the 20th century, the Parisian hôtel particulier had evolved in many directions,
including the block-long apartment buildings that lined the Boulevards of Haussmann
and countless tasteful bourgeois courtyard townhouses. Chareau’s project was to be
sited in an example of the latter. Chareau’s original plan may well have been to demol-
ish the building in entirety and insert a modernist building into the heart of its traditional
fabric. But in the end, only the first three stories of the back and one side of the court-
yard building were ultimately demolished.
In their place, the designers inserted the iconic space with its multi-story salon and
steel framework of patterned glass. In addition to serving as a medical clinic, the salon
of the Maison de Verre was a meeting place for anti-fascist intellectuals, Surrealist
poets, film-makers and artists including Walter Benjamin, Jean Cocteau, Joan Mirò
and Louis Aragon. Then, as now, the masterwork was visible to passing outsiders only
briefly, when the gate of the residence at 31 Rue St.-Guillaume swung open.
In many ways, the Maison de Verre was a harbinger of contemporary practice, in
which design is often expressed through exquisite selection, placement, detailing and
assembly of industrialized systems and their elements. It is also emblematic of a world
in which iconic signature works of architecture often remain hidden from sight and
inaccessible, known almost exclusively through published images.
![Page 201: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
192 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
The orthogonal character of preceding examples should not be misinterpreted: Noth-
ing in systems approaches to design inherently limits building geometry. The Hysolar
Institute employs two basic orthogonal modules − a rectangle and a square. However,
geometric inflections in the relative position of the elements create a spatial corridor
and an architecture that is rich, complex and open.
Special Topic
Incorporating industrialized systems
Hysolar Research Institute Stuttgart, Germany (1987) Behnisch & Partner, Architect
6.44 Aerial view. Copyrighted photo courtesy of
Behnisch Architekten
6.45 Exterior. Copyrighted photo by William Veerbeek,
courtesy of the photographer
![Page 202: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 193
6.48 Diagrammatic design plans. Copyrighted drawing
courtesy of Behnisch Architekten
6.46 Interior. Copyrighted photo courtesy of Behnisch Architekten 6.47 Diagram showing square and rectangular
design modules. Copyrighted drawing by Andrés
Mignucci, based on the architect’s drawings
diagram of plan modules
![Page 203: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
194 WORKING WITH A PRIMARY ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEM
Advanced Play − Combining Systems
Some designers easily start to envision the architectural potential of a building system
based on a sparse array of elements. Others, by virtue of different education, skills
and natural affinities, prefer to focus first on the building shape, its façade and/or the
character of its interior spaces, secure in the knowledge that a structure to order, build
and support it can surely follow.
It is natural for a designer to have strong predilections and lean toward designing
in certain ways rather than others. However the intent of thematic design plays is
to enhance the fundamental versatility and resilience that permit a designer to start
… anywhere. Hopefully, whether you start with a building system, building type, style
or thematic series of spaces, the end result is a well designed, rational, articulated,
constructible, inspiring and ultimately appropriate and useable built form. That ability
to begin from any number of points of departure and design confidently is necessary
for successful design intervention in complex built environment.
Play 6b − Introduce a particular style
• Start with the final three-dimensional form of Play 6a as your design framework.
• Develop the design, incorporating a new and different style of your choosing.
• Articulate that theme through a number of moves.
It is not necessary to design a whole building for the purposes of this play. However, the
resulting design should provide a strong indication of the look and feel your building
would achieve, if carried further as a formal exercise in building design.
Play 6c − Extend design down to the level of partitioning
• Explore various wall thicknesses and heights, partition types and details.
• Assemble a kit of parts for interior partitioning.
• Begin to define rooms and partitions in a sequence of step-wise additive moves.
Frameworks of basic system elements presented in exterior models, axonometric
drawings and elevation studies are insufficient for exploring the essential experiential
character of inhabited interior space. As a proof-of-concept for your design, start to
look at how you would partition the interior to create places of specific character. While
you may chose to complete the interior partitioning of space throughout, or extend it to
more than one floor, it is sufficient to suggest via limited examples or vignette sketches
a range of types of rooms, partitions and partitioning strategies.
![Page 204: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 195
At the end of Chapter 6, it is useful to once more return to the built field beyond the
studio and observe the systematic character of its widely shared architectural systems.
To start, select a few buildings that appear to be “of a kind” − i.e., that seem to share a
somewhat similar set of elements and formal approach. They may represent everyday
buildings that follow a similar typology, style, ethos and/or method of construction.
Or they may be far-flung examples of a specific building type or style; the products
of a particular “school” of architectural design; or a series of buildings designed by a
particular architect.
Try to gain access to the buildings, themselves. (If that fails, gather plans, sections,
elevations, photos and other descriptions.) Focus on one or two physical systems
that contribute strongly to the common architectural character of the ensemble. They
might be structural systems, recurring combinations of cladding, fenestration and
exterior detailing or recurring elements that define a specific design system or style.
Compare buildings and try to identify specific recurring elements together with the
underlying rules that seem to regulate their placement.
Record your findings in words, drawings and images.
Now consider the limits of the architectural system:
• What can it do?
• How far can it be pushed?
• Does it easily accommodate growth upwards and/or horizontally? If so, how?
• What is the character of the normal spaces it provides?
• How are larger served spaces created? What characteristics do they share?
Prior to proceeding to the concluding section of this chapter, carefully assess and
double-check your environmental observation:
• Is your analysis of the elements, rules and capacities observed accurate?
• Is it complete, or are there rules and/or parts you failed to record in describing
the system?
• How would you more thoroughly describe the observed system?
Structured Observation
Analyzing systems
![Page 205: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
196
7.1 Opera House. Sydney, Australia (1973). Jørn Utzon,
Architect. Copyrighted photo by Matthew Field,
courtesy of the photographer
![Page 206: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
197
Begin with architectural systems
Combine multiple systems
to create unique
hybrid form –
places as rich, complex and dynamic
as everyday environment
7 Combining Systems and Controlling Complexity
![Page 207: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
198 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
PURPOSE OF THE PLAY
This chapter focuses on the rich architectural meaning and formal possibilities inherent
in juxtaposing multiple systems. Architecture − whether thematic or non-thematic − is
defined by the ways in which each designer combines systems. Mastering the ability
to select architectural systems, combine them and express their materiality, strengths
and spatial characteristics is of paramount importance.
Play 7 is about combining systems to jointly structure three-dimensional form, space
and experience. The design of overlapping or interweaving systems is a challenge
in itself. The play also serves as a vehicle for further hands-on exploration of zoning
and distribution of material in three-dimensional space. It provides an opportunity to
observe the reciprocal influence between a system’s parts and the zones that struc-
ture their placement.
The methods and explorations presented in this chapter anticipate architectural
intervention in the context of large and complex everyday built fields, which ordinarily
comes about under the hands of multiple players.
Stacking systems
Architecture is rarely composed using a single form making system: Architectural
systems tend to be arrayed in combination, for reasons that are first and foremost
formal and conventional, rather than technical.
There are a vast number of ways to combine and superimpose systems. Perhaps the
most fundamental way is to stack them vertically. Architecture is shaped in large part
by the combined character of the systems selected and by how and where the transi-
tion from a lower system to an upper system takes shape.
Until the 20th century, physically and visually lighter systems were generally placed on
top of heavier ones. Traditional vernacular architecture continues to place wood upon
stone or brick when both varieties of material are locally available. Juxtaposing heavi-
ness and lightness is one way to make built form speak.
On a primal level, the material properties of stone, brick, block and other massive stere-
otomic systems are associated with earthbound ground forms. They rely upon mass to
transfer forces and are naturally strongest and most efficient in compression, some-
what weaker in tension. Inherently, they work most efficiently when directly transfer-
ring vertical loads. Horizontal slabs of natural stone − or, less frequently, brick − may
Introduction
![Page 208: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 199
be laid on the ground to form structural platforms. They may otherwise be stacked to
create bearing walls or piers or laid on end to form columns. They may also extend
outward horizontally to define protected space below, when expertly corbelled, arched,
domed or reinforced with a secondary material to maintain constant compression, or in
carefully engineered simple or complex cantilevers.
Wood assumes many different forms as it structures log, post-and-beam and stick-
built buildings, arches, planar roofs and domes. Because wood is ideal for creating
lightweight frameworks, it is closely associated with upward-reaching tectonic frame-
works or sky-forms. Wood is somewhat weaker in compression but far lighter in weight
and stronger and more efficient in tension and bending than stone. It is therefore an
ideal natural material for spanning horizontally and easily transfers horizontal forces
vertically through bending and/or use of tensile connections.
These primal materials can be shaped and refined in a number of ways to create
diverse architectural systems for varied purposes. Combined systems may be as
simple as wooden posts resting upon solitary stones, timber frameworks set on or into
stone platforms or walls or stud walls bolted onto concrete or block foundations. Most
commonly, combined systems lift wood up to protect it. No matter how elaborate the
combination becomes, it provides solid bearing, transfers loads down into the earth
and avoids or mitigates contact with the destructive combination of moisture together
with air.
How systems are elaborated and set into place in combination makes all the differ-
ence. Wide-ranging vernacular examples include:
• relatively light mud brick upper walls bearing upon massive stone lower
walls. Urban fabrics of such buildings have appeared with increasing sophistica-
tion since rise of the Anatolian town of Çatalhöyük (7500 BC) and similar Neolithic
settlements.
• wooden frameworks of columns and beams. Traditional wood frame struc-
ture often bears on a stone platforms or column bases. Japanese minka are notable
for their addition of delicate infill panels to create closure.
• table-like timber column and roof structures resting on massive stone
platforms are a common feature of pavilions and temples throughout many build-
ing cultures.
![Page 209: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
200 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
Traditional combinations of systems vs. the new game
Traditionally, pairings of systems have evolved in response to the preferences of social
groups and local building cultures. Those systems subsequently become bound to one
another, to one or more building types and to mental images and hands-on traditions of
how to build in a particular place. Experience, expedience, tradition and collective iden-
tity then extended those thematic ways of building everyday places to the construction
of non-thematic buildings wherever possible.
Local combinations of systems contribute to the coherence of extant built environ-
ment, respect local ways of building and capitalize on local strengths and advantages.
They have often been optimized to perform together efficiently with minimal invest-
ment of material or labor. At other times, they are jointly structured to convey power,
privilege, identity and/or religious significance … or simply to radiate beauty. Whatever
the defining purpose, combining systems that are locally familiar serves to maintain
operational clarity: Their method and sequence of construction, interface and detailing
has become second nature. Commonsense therefore often favors working with locally
appropriate combinations over importing systems that are exotic or invented − and
potentially poorly understood.
7.2 Stacking wooden boxes on concrete frames
Lovell Beach House, Newport Beach, California
(1926). R.M. Schindler’s architectural decision
to combine building systems provided structural
durability, privacy, openness and seismic isolation
while also minimizing onsite work. During
construction, light and open structurally independent
boxes framed in wood were manufactured offsite,
hoisted up into place and secured within the awaiting
array of concrete frames. Copyrighted photo by
Andrés Mignucci
7.3 A wooden framework bears directly on stone in this
preserved gassho-zukuri style minka farmhouse (Ogimachi
Village, Japan). The walls and foundation support a reed and
straw thatched roof. Copyrighted photo by Bernard Gagnon,
courtesy of the photographer
![Page 210: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
INTRODUCTION 201
The use of systems based on natural and regionally available building materials −
both field-assembled onsite and fabricated in local factories − has been declining for
several centuries. They have given way to systems based on synthesized or composite
materials that require equally new technologies of assembly. New systems incorporat-
ing new materials − reinforced concrete, extruded steel, aluminum, vinyl and other
plastics, structural glass panels and various composites, etc. − have joined or replaced
traditional stone, brick and wood construction. These global changes have accompa-
nied revolutions in structural analysis, fastening systems, adhesives, building produc-
tion and supply chains.
Two comparatively new materials now dominate stereotomic and tectonic building
systems in contemporary architecture: Reinforced concrete has supplanted the use
of traditional brick and stone, while steel has replaced older structural systems based
on wood.
The creation of uninterrupted large-scale open spans used to require massive arches,
domes, triangulated trusses or bents. Advanced materials, structural analysis and
engineering have now revolutionized the design of long-span architecture. Today, vast
unbroken spans have grown commonplace. Traditional structural configurations are
joined by vierendeel trusses, multi-story box beams, space frames, various tube and
tensile structures and any manner of laminated structural wood forms − from straight-
forward built-up beams to invented forms such as the elaborate roof brackets that hold
up the Council Chamber Roof at Alvar Aalto’s Säynätsalo Town Hall in Finland.
In short, change − both in contemporary materials, settings, uses and systems and
in the rules and social and technical organization of building − has transformed the
game. Architects still benefit from the traditional form making knowledge embedded
in ancient places and typologies that have persisted for hundreds or thousands of
years. However, the tight mutually defining bond between a people, its culture of build-
ing, primary building typology and chosen combination of architectural systems has
loosened. As in many non-architectural facets of life, we have moved from cultur-
ally prescribed one-size-fits-all solutions to open-ended mix-and-match pairings of
systems that are often market-driven. Together, these changes offer a previously
unimaginable palette of formal and technical possibilities.
Average building size, complexity, number of incorporated systems and performance
requirements have increased. The range of forms, options, assumptions, technolo-
gies and requirements is also different and greatly expanded. The increased variety of
systems and freedom to combine them demands a full understanding of the system-
atic nature of the art of building and hands-on mastery of the skills necessary to make
good form.
7.4 Long-span laminated wood beams. Caserne des
Pompiers (Fire Station), Limbourg, Belgium (1998).
Baumans-Deffet Architects. Copyrighted photo by
Alain Janssens, courtesy of the architect
![Page 211: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
202 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
Compose a number of built fields utilizing the depicted systems and incorporating a
planning grid to organize design. The goal is to create series of varied forms out of a
given combination of systems while respecting the architectural integrity and expres-
sion of each individual system.
Play 7
Stacking Systems
Base systems
Upper system: Steel frame
arrayed steel posts supporting beams above
Intermediate system: Prefabricated
reinforced concrete
Precast “table”: prefabricated column, beam and
topping slab assembly
Lower system: Cast-in-place concrete
pier/column/wall and beam assemblies
continuous concrete channels
reinforced slabs
grid
16' (4.8m) planning grid with 12' × 12' (3.6m × 3.6m)
zones and 4' (1.2m) margins
12'(3.6m)
4 '(1.2m)
.6m).6m).6m).6m)
.6m).6m).6m).6m)
![Page 212: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
PLAY 7 − STACKING SYSTEMS 203
RULES OF PLAY
Setting up play
• Start with the systems, zones and margins provided.
• Allow the form to build incrementally, rather than designing based on a predeter-
mined volumetric envelope.
Including and stacking systems
• Avoid changing the relative ascending order of lower, intermediate and upper
systems.
• Every play should incorporate the table system.
• For practical or architectural reasons, design may extraordinarily exclude either
other system in whole or part, particularly during your first play. The table system will
then function either as a lower system or as an upper system.
Adjusting systems
• The elevation height of the top of any building system may rise in whole or part to
accommodate changes in the ground form or to accommodate a particular served
space or use or elevate its importance.
• Conversely, stacked systems may compress down in total height. Two or even three
systems can exceptionally be stacked within a single story.
• More generally, bearing heights may freely move up or down within a single struc-
tural bay or even point-by-point.
Modifying design systems and elements
• Do not eliminate any margins.
• Freely extend the 7 × 7 module starting grid.
• Punched-hole openings of reasonable size may be introduced into concrete slabs
and channels.
• The kit of parts of the steel upper system may be expanded to incorporate a roofing
system.
Media and presentation
• Perform and present this play in the media of your choice.
• Compose a minimum of three plays.
• Your performance need not produce a functional building design; however, the step-
by-step final presentation should make sense as a narrative of making form.
• Any rules you have adopted for positioning parts and configurations in relation to
zoning should be self-evident in the final form.
• The final design of each layered system should work as an autonomous form with
its own architectural identity.
![Page 213: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
204 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
STRATEGIES
Expand form incrementally
Build form move by move, as opposed to creating an overall volume and infilling it.
Maximize the benefit of zones, margins and (perhaps) grids
Use building planning methods to rationalize and coordinate the juxtaposition of multi-
ple systems in three-dimensional space.
Use zones and grids strategically
Building planning and zoning grids are tools to achieve good form. Use them to the
extent that they help to achieve that purpose.
Adjust margins
Adjust and fine-tune the dimensions of the margins. Expand or contract them freely as
required: globally, in certain areas only or individually.
Stop and start systems as desired
Systems may exceptionally start and stop, appear and disappear. For instance, the
upper systems may be eliminated such that a lower system rises up to directly support
a roof; the steel frame upper system may exceptionally extend directly down to the
ground plane.
Decide how and where stacked systems meet
A great deal of the look and feel of design reflects the character of how and where
systems connect.
Refine systems based on use and placement
Refine the character of each system based on its function in the stacking sequence.
When lower systems carry loads, make them heavier. When systems form the top layer
of structure, consider making their structural elements lighter.
Explore unanticipated lateral connections
Vertically displacing zones of transition may sometimes build lateral connections
between hierarchically distinct systems. Explore the formal potential of such unantici-
pated connections.
In-Depth Considerations
![Page 214: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
IN-DEPTH CONSIDERATIONS 205
BEAR IN MIND
Building planning
The dimension of the planning module corresponds to the plan dimension of the prefab-
ricated square table structures of the intermediary system. Together, they establish the
dimensional range of a normative small-room-sized spatial module throughout the
built field. The tartan grid also incorporates margins that provide freedom and a rule
structure to guide you as you shift form horizontally to expand use areas and organize
dedicated three-dimensional space for a system of horizontal and vertical circulation.
Transitions between systems
Architectural systems tend to overlap, interact back and forth or interlock in zones
of transition. The location, character and extent of such zones will vary greatly. Their
design in plan, section or elevation helps to define architectural character.
Vertical transitions between stacked systems commonly occur along elevated hori-
zontal planes that correspond roughly to floor heights. Yet there are many variations:
The horizontal plane where upper and lower system meet can rise and fall to reflect
the spatial volume, use or symbolic importance of interior space, or simply to create
a powerful visual interlock. As the variety of conditions increases, so does the oppor-
tunity to articulate alternative details to accommodate fenestration, door openings,
changes in wall materials, etc.
Downward flow of force
As noted earlier, architecture often benefits from freeing up structural elements and
allowing them to adjust slightly at the edge of margins, rather than rigidly stacking
supporting members on each floor. Depending on the ability of the upper system to
transfer vertical loads and of the lower system’s elements to carry them, it may be
possible to position load-bearing columns without restriction within the upper configu-
ration, as when light wood framing bears upon a concrete waffle slab.
To shift or not to shift
Shifting primary building geometries, dimensions, grids and/or alignments is a power-
ful form making technique. It should be weighed carefully and used strategically. When
building forms shift, the inevitable break of interior planes, alignments and planning
zones at the point of inflection bears major design implications and creates complex-
ity. Its resolution echoes throughout all subsequent design, detailing and construction.
Secondary directions should be introduced in ways that avoid discontinuities which are
unintentionally jarring. Executed skillfully, such intensifications can convey significant
meaning and add richness.
![Page 215: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
206 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
The abstract form-making systems introduced in Play 7 provided the point of depar-
ture for this play. The individual and combined capacities and limits of the systems are
tested without particular regard to defining habitable spaces in a building.
The multiple systems and their elements freely shift in both plan and section. A broad
range of juxtapositions results. For example: In one area, the heavy lower system rises
up 2+ stories. Elsewhere, one table exceptionally bears directly upon the ground plane
with no intervening lower system. Zones, margins and grids help to rationalize and
coordinate the somewhat open-ended juxtaposition of systems in 3D.
Served space throughout the form is marked by vertical and/or horizontal transloca-
tions, often combined with the omission of some system components.
Sample Play 7.1
The Red Column House
![Page 216: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
SAMPLE PLAY 7.1 − THE RED COLUMN HOUSE 207
M4M3
M1 M2
![Page 217: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
208 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
For reasons of convention and commonsense, transitions between façade systems
commonly occur above the first or second story at about floor height. The vertical zone
of transition is generally marked on the façade by a change in cladding material, often
emphasized by a belt course.
Betanzos, a well-preserved capital city of the ancient Galician Empire, is renowned
for the architectural character of its combined façade glazing systems. The lower
system forms a stereotomic granite-and-masonry base. It builds upward, articulating
the ground form of each building. The lighter tectonic frameworks of white multi-story
glazed galleries are hung across the uppermost part of the building as a secondary
system. They start at the roofline, project outward beyond the plane of the façade and
extend downward one or more stories.
The zone of exchange between the two vertical systems varies from building to
building. As a rule, a vertical spatial connector between the two systems is intro-
duced: An ornate intermediary balcony with tall open space immediately overhead
is generally hung below the gallery. Spanning the width of the building, it provides a
material stop for the upward climb of the lower system. As a result, the two systems
never actually touch.
Throughout the varied designs, the two systems and their respective kits of parts and
rules hold constant.
Special Topic
Stacking façade systems
Betanzos, Galicia (Spain)
![Page 218: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 209
7.6 Descending vertical zones of transition
Photo © 1983 by Andrés Mignucci
7.5 Stacking of façade systems along a street
Measured documentation drawing © 1983 by Andrés
Mignucci and R. Thomas Hille
![Page 219: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
210 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
There is nothing accidental about forms in and around the historic Piazza della Signoria
and its immediate surroundings: Since its beginnings, the urban public space that
symbolizes the political, financial and military seat of power of the former Florentine
Republic has remained subject to constant design scrutiny and control. History, poli-
tics, internecine struggles, rising and falling fortunes and fashions are preserved in the
physical record of successive upgrades of its street façades.
Although transitions between heavy lower systems and light upper systems − and/or
between thicker and thinner structural elements − generally occur at floor level, the
building façades that surround the Piazza della Signoria tend to mark transitions 1-½
stories above ground, at the height of the windowsills. This marking may simply entail
the placement of a slender decorative belt course that interrupts a uniform continuous
surface extending from top to bottom. Or it may involve a transition from heavier to
lighter material, from rusticated to finer stone finishes, stucco or some other material.
At other times, the actual physical transition from heavier to lighter construction actu-
ally occurs at a different height, which may also be expressed in the façade.
From a systems perspective, the meaning of the transitions that are uniformly observ-
able throughout the Piazza della Signoria are often indeterminate: At times, they
signal profound changes in the building’s structural systems that ripple throughout the
façade, underlying structure and detailing. At other times, they are entirely unrelated
to systems or building structure, added to the façade simply to build urban continuity.
7.7 Palazzo Vecchio approach
Special Topic
Stacking façade systems
Piazza della Signoria Florence (12th century onward)
7.8 Façades along side street leading to the Palazzo
Vecchio
![Page 220: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 211
7.9 Piazza view to the northeast
Figs. 7.7–7.9 photos © 2012 Sam Teicher, courtesy of
the photographer
![Page 221: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
212 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
Special Topic
Combining tectonic and stereotomic systems
Casa De Blas Madrid, Spain (2000) Alberto Campo Baeza, Architect
Ancient builders often had recourse to few − if any − viable alternative combina-
tions of systems. Today, by contrast, advances in building engineering, technology
and material science, combined with the increasing variety and availability of systems,
often renders the selection a question of architectural expression. The Casa De Blas
stresses contrast and separation between superimposed tectonic and stereotomic
systems with a highly disciplined geometry. The first floor − an enclosed stereotomic
continuous surface geometry with minimal openings − contrasts with a top floor made
as light and transparent as possible, rendered in glass and steel.
7.12 Interior view of concrete base form
7.10 Exterior approach
Copyrighted photos by Hisao Suzuki, courtesy of
the architect
7.11 Interior view of terraced top floor
![Page 222: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 213
Sky Form System
Steel post and beam structure with glass infill
Ground Form System
Continuous surface masonry ground form structure with
punched-hole window openings
Elevation
The elevation shows the simple stacking of both
architectural systems − tectonic above and
stereotomic below.
7.14 Sky form and ground form plans and
side elevation. Copyrighted drawings
courtesy of the architect
7.13 Generative sketch diagrams. Copyrighted
drawings courtesy of the architect
~ f';' "uu.. do 7Tec.ro;Jl'C
11-< ~~c. + +t.c~t::
= .A- (I. ,{-H r;:-Cn V It f'
~~c.~~c.~~c.
~~c.~~c.
~~c.~~c.
~~c. ~~c.~~c.
~~c. ~~c.~~c.
~~c. ~~c.~~c.
~~c.
~~c.~~c.
~~c.~~c.
~~c.
~~c.
~~c.
~~c.
![Page 223: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
214 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
Architecture sometimes combines vertical stacking of multiple building systems with
horizontal layering of different systems. Continuous juxtaposition and interaction of
systems generates a three-dimensional built field, in which multiple systems jointly
define overlapping zones of territory, use and circulation and jointly create closure and
position wall openings, passages and transitions.
In the context of rocky, wooded, somewhat sloping terrain, Maurice Smith’s Blackman
House No. 1 reframes the age-old dialogue between stone foundational form and shel-
tering timber frame. Operating at a residential scale, it suggests the potential inherent
in stepwise juxtaposition of free flowing yet highly ordered arrays of systems orches-
trated by a single designer.
At ground level, a perimeter of massive single or stacked granite slabs begins to define
a built field. It partially encloses a freeform arrangement of variable height base walls
of concrete block. The granite walls subsequently become exterior site walls while the
block walls begin to act as lower system walls that define building spaces. They also
provide bearing for light wooden frames that are perched entrepreneurially above.
Roofs and various varieties of screens then complete the definition of space horizon-
tally and vertically. In providing closure, they define inside and outside, while filtering or
framing natural light and views to the broader landscape.
Blackman House presents a highly structured aggregation of smaller, partial and
somewhat autonomous moves. The built-up form is organized and unified by a subtle
underlying 4' (1.2 m) design grid and by the continued repetition of key dimensions
and of design motifs that recur at multiple scales.
Special Topic
Combining tectonic and stereotomic systems
Blackman House No. 1 Groton, Massachusetts (1963) Maurice K. Smith, Architect
7.15 Exterior view showing three principal systems −
granite, concrete block and wood frame
structures. Copyrighted photo courtesy of
Henry Plummer
![Page 224: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 215
7.18 Diagram illustrating underlying 4' (120cm)
planning grid. Copyrighted sketch courtesy
of the architect
7.16 Ground Form System
Granite and masonry block continuous
surface structure
7.17 Secondary System
Wooden post and beam structure
Copyrighted drawings illustrating ground form and
secondary system bearing upon primary system
by Andrés Mignucci, based on drawings by the
architect
![Page 225: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
216 COMBINING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLLING COMPLEXITY
7.20 Interior at twilight. Copyrighted photo by
Henry Plummer, courtesy of the photographer
7.19 Framed view. Copyrighted photo by
Maurice K. Smith from the Intrinsic Attributes
of Built Form Assemblage special library
collection of MIT Dome digitized content,
courtesy of the architect
![Page 226: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
SPECIAL TOPICS 217
Special Topic
Building the connections between systems
How built forms join and connect major systems is a defining characteristic of their
architecture. Designing the material and spatial character of those connections poses
a considerable detailing challenge and opportunity.
One notable architectural detailing approach to bringing together two systems is to
use an intermediary spatial connector: The systems remain physically separate. They
are bridged by a third mediating system, a spacer that provides a common interface
while also contrasting differences between the two primary systems. This is a particu-
larly useful form-making strategy in distinguishing what is old and what is new when
making additions and alterations to existing buildings.
Another design approach consists of creating “passing connections” in which each
primary system briefly connects with the other then continues through, as when beams
extend through and beyond tall bearing walls or split columns.
7.22 Horizontal and vertical passing connections are
both visible in this light structural framework of oak.
Blackman House No. 2, Manchester, Massachusetts,
USA (1993). Maurice K. Smith, Architect. Photo ©
1993 Barry Zevin, from the Intrinsic Attributes of Built
Form Assemblage special library collection of MIT
Dome digitized content, courtesy of the photographer
7.21 Intermediary spatial connectors highlight the
horizontal and vertical structural connections of
beams that support the canopy. Ecole Fonds-de-
Loup, Andrimont, Belgium (2000). Baumans-Deffet
Architecture et Urbanisme, Architect. Note as well
the passing connections of the wooden rafters and
purlins that bear upon the steel beams. Copyrighted
photo by Alain Janssens, courtesy of the architect
![Page 227: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
218
0.28 Exterior wall detail. The Kolumba, Cologne (2007)
Peter Zumthor, Architect. Copyrighted photo by
Andrés Mignucci
![Page 228: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
219
As architects, our form making visions negotiate between buildability and what is already
in place. Such constraints do not represent intrinsically opposing forces. Together, they
can actually open the floodgates of creativity and beneficially direct the flow of struc-
turing ideas, spatial concepts and forms.
Constraints in the academic design studio are often artful recipes, combining an
implicit theoretical stance, a site, a context, a rudimentary program and perhaps a
touch of building code and zoning. Professional practice multiplies those constraints.
Zoning laws, existing conditions above and below ground, politicians, building industry
conventions, multiple interleaved or overlapping planning and building codes, addi-
tional laws and regulations, complex clients and neighborhood groups, engineers,
financiers, insurers, budgets, programmers, builders, markets, schedules, etc. may all
shape design.
Constraints represent structures that are present in a given place, forces that are
not under the designer’s control. The hands-on knack of architecture is in large part
a question of becoming expert in improvisational and additive design: in building a
creative vision upon pre-existing structures and layers, within existing frameworks not
of one’s own creation, then adjusting and transforming them in unanticipated ways. An
architect at his or her best must be a pragmatic poet.
Thematic design recognizes additional constraints: It first seeks to observe the living
fabric of everyday environment, its rich underlying legacy of architectural, construc-
tional, territorial, sociocultural and historical structures and how they continue to
evolve. Not simply in an abstract academic or theoretical way, but in ways that directly
apply to design and form making. It challenges us to create architecture that smartly
and purposefully serves not just ourselves, our profession and our clients, but the built
environment as the essential, dynamic and complex collective setting of our lives.
Building Upon What is There
Afterword
![Page 229: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
220 AFTERWORD
This book about composing form has focused on observing and working with different
varieties of design frameworks − armatures that can directly structure the making of
buildings at varied scales through a sequential process of transformation. The specific
ways in which buildings, configurations, systems, assemblies and parts connect and
how many different dispersed and diverse groups of designers assemble the design,
how they choose to layer in what is already in place and how they design the physical
assemblies that define the architecture are no less important.
Physical assemblies
From large-scale territory down to architectural detailing, the physical, systemic and/or
operational transitions where systems, configurations and parts come together locate
the bounds of autonomous units of potential transformation. In essence, the place-
ment, coordination and detailing of such environmental assemblages (assemblies,
interfaces or joints) set the parameters of subsequent change. Those parameters in
turn determine the ease and pace of change. Like control joints in concrete or snap
connectors in a children’s building set, they define places where transformation and
evolution can occur by design.
They also delineate the limits of building maintenance, rehabilitation, restoration and
repurposing. They often dictate how systems, parts and materials are repaired or
demolished, recycled or discarded. For these reasons, as increasing varieties of tech-
nical systems with vastly different useful life cycles are incorporated into architecture,
buildings and spaces must be primed for change.
Within each building, the boundaries, types of connections and degree of separa-
tion that transitional spatial connectors establish at every level of built environment
ultimately determine whether individual forms, systems and networks can freely trans-
form and adapt to changing uses, specifications, times and urban conditions. They
predetermine each building’s useful life and the freedom of others to transform it
throughout its existence.
Layers of intervention
The built environment represents a series of layered interventions. No one starts with
a totally clean slate, no one designs forward in complete isolation and control. Whether
other built forms are close or distant, ancient or subsequent − and whether they form
part of our own intervention, structure it or parallel it − what we design shares the built,
historical and sociocultural landscape with other eras, projects and designers.
Bringing Form Together −
Assemblages, Layers and Frameworks
![Page 230: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
BRINGING FORM TOGETHER − ASSEMBLAGES, LAYERS AND FRAMEWORKS 221
Every design − willingly or unwillingly − is framed by that pre-existing context. Its complex
structure has evolved and differentiated over millennia in order to permit growth, renewal
and sustainable transformation to occur at distinct levels and time frames. At the same
time, each new intervention becomes a framework for future interventions by others.
Some may be prominent, others quiet, subtle and anonymous. Nonetheless, the built
environment is the product of countless hands shaping context, purpose and meaning
within a dynamic process back and forth through time.
The question is what we choose to do with that understanding and how, among so
many alternative precedents, we address what is already in place.
![Page 231: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
222 AFTERWORD
URBAN LEVEL
Diocletian’s Palace, the Cathedral of St. Gallen and any number of great Roman
arenas illustrate the varied transformation over time of non-thematic architecture that
is built on a grand urban scale for a very precise initial purpose. As a rule, even such
monofunctional monumental forms are absorbed into the surrounding built fabric over
the centuries. Eventually, they serve as the foundation layer and context of endless
subsequent interventions over time.
The process can also reverse over time, as in Jerusalem. There, many thematic build-
ings that have grown up over the centuries around historical sites have been demol-
ished, the better to connect the modern city to its sacred ancient sites.
At other times, the vestiges of the original structures disappear, recycled and reab-
sorbed into the everyday built environment. Yet their urban imprint remains: a clear
objective correlative of building upon structures that are already in place, designing
within the context previously created by other designers.
0.29 Ruins of the original palace 0.30 Superimposition of the existing urban fabric
(red) upon the original palace (black). The
vestiges of Diocletian’s Palace eventually served as
a base form for a succession of interventions. Over
the centuries, it was gradually transformed into a
dense urban fabric.
Diocletian’s Palace. Split (Spalato), Croatia (ad 305)
Copyrighted drawings by Andrés Mignucci based on an
original documentation drawing (1764) by Robert Adam
![Page 232: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
BRINGING FORM TOGETHER − ASSEMBLAGES, LAYERS AND FRAMEWORKS 223
0.32 Roman amphitheater continuing to shape
buildings and public space. Lucca, Italy
Aerial view © 2013 Google Image / Digital Globe
0.31 Roman amphitheater absorbed into urban
fabric. Florence. Copyrighted drawing based on
a 1924 drawing by Corinto Corinti from Urban
Transformations by Rodrigo Pérez de Arce, courtesy
of the author
![Page 233: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
224 AFTERWORD
BUILDING LEVEL
After careful evaluation, the ruins of two ancient stone farmhouses on a hill were
spared demolition. However, they were not absorbed into the new building structure
onsite. Instead, a new and physically, systemically and visually distinct architectural
core was inserted into their midst.
Two very different systems of walls serve as integral parts of the resulting compos-
ite form. They are similarly stuccoed and painted white in the spirit of the vernacular
architecture of southern Portugal. Nonetheless, the two systems reflect the design
sensibility, architecture and construction of vastly different approaches set in different
eras. The vestigial stereotomic stone walls express the direct flow of structural forces
to the ground. By contrast, the contemporary design of the architect’s intervention in
reinforced concrete freely expresses itself in large cantilevers.
In the resulting dialogue between systems, forms, styles and eras, the juxtaposed
ancient perimeter walls and contemporary core never actually touch.
0.33 Site plan with ruin indicated in red. Copyrighted
drawing courtesy of the architect
0.34 Old (left) and new (right) are juxtaposed to form a unique new
whole. Photo © Daniel Malhão, courtesy of the architect
Casa em Alenquer, Portugal (2001). Aires Mateus, Architect
![Page 234: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
BRINGING FORM TOGETHER − ASSEMBLAGES, LAYERS AND FRAMEWORKS 225
0.37 Photo. The wall to the left is part of the original ruin.
Photo © Daniel Malhão, courtesy of the architect
0.35 Ruins prior to intervention. Photo © Francisco
Aires Mateus, courtesy of the architect
0.36 Sections. The original walls are indicated in red.
Copyrighted drawings courtesy of the architect
![Page 235: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
226 AFTERWORD
INFILL LEVEL
Within Carlo Scarpa’s architectural interventions in rich historical and formal contexts
such as the Querini Stampalia Foundation and Olivetti Showroom in Venice and the
Castelvecchio Museum in Verona, the idea of building layered conversations between
forms across the centuries is brought down to the scale of materials and detailing. The
designs physically express the idea of building upon the past and of intervening at a
fine-grained human scale.
Carlo Scarpa’s intervention in history rejects walling over the past, period restoration or
appropriation, imitation or mannerist reinvention of archaic styles. Instead, his design
celebrates history as backdrop and context. In bold and unapologetic contrast to its
pre-existing physical context, his intervention celebrates both what is old and what is
new, painstakingly intertwining a new layer of form with what is already in place.
His strategy for weaving disparate eras into a coherent whole relies to a great extent on
building transitional connectors to serve as zones of transition. Form moves between
the ancient and the new within three-dimensional margins in which intensive juxtapo-
sition and resolution of contrasting spaces, shapes, materials, geometries, textures
and styles occurs.
To strengthen the connection between disparate spatial and configurational design
elements within those spatial transitions, the architect selectively introduces physi-
cal and visual interlock within a zone of intensive back-and-forth exchange between
old and new forms. The fine-grained material surfaces are bathed in carefully shaped
direct and indirect lighting, surrounded by meticulously detailed material connections.
In the museum, the design of the form is interwoven with its contents, echoing its
precious materials, artifacts, art and sculpture.
In sum, Scarpa’s design approach intimately builds upon the traces of past interven-
tions. Each intervention − including Scarpa’s own − articulates a physical connection
to the past while remaining faithful to its own time. The result is an ongoing conversa-
tion between forms across the centuries.
![Page 236: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
BRINGING FORM TOGETHER − ASSEMBLAGES, LAYERS AND FRAMEWORKS 227
0.38 Interior. Palazzo Querini Stampalia, Venice (1952)
Carlo Scarpa, Architect. Copyrighted photo by
Christian Kerber, reprinted with permission
0.39 Exterior detail. Olivetti Showroom, Venice (1958)
Carlo Scarpa, Architect. Photo by Seier + Seier,
licensed under Creative Commons 2.0
![Page 237: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
228 AFTERWORD
FRAMEWORKS
Context
In the design studio, design within existing sites provides a carefully bounded simulation
that is intended to represent a much broader realm of complex contextual frameworks
and constraints. History, existing conditions, geo-climatic forces and, above all, histori-
cal vestiges serve as metaphors: Every act of environmental design is contextual.
This reality has been observed with ambivalence as far back as Andrea Palladio, whose
copious and painstaking illustrations omit any hint of surrounding buildings, vestiges
of buildings or other urban structures or fabric. In practical terms, context presented
no problem for Palladio, who built his reputation designing freestanding villas for the
landed gentry of the Veneto. Nor was it a problem for generations of architects who
followed: Until the late 19th century, architects and their powerful clients simply didn’t
concern themselves with the everyday built fields surrounding Architecture, let alone
intervene in their creation.
Systems
The environmental coherence that we observe and experience is the product of recur-
ring patterns, forms, systems and other structures and forms of social agreement.
Together, they create an armature that allows us to build form of an agreed-upon
character and establish each fabric of place.
Systems, their capacity and juxtaposition in three-dimensional space are therefore
key. They scaffold form, guiding it and allowing it to grow in an organized fashion, while
also separating various parts. The goal is often to orchestrate how domains of control,
systems, configurations and parts are brought together while maintaining appropriate
degrees of separation. Nonetheless, the surrounding issues are not technical. They
concern building with common understanding.
Coordinated transformation sequences are vehicles of growth, maintenance, repair and
evolution within the built environment. They embody agreement about how to transform
what is already in place, while establishing open frameworks for others who follow.
![Page 238: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
THEMATIC DESIGN AT THE DAWN OF A NEW MILLENNIUM 229
Increasingly over the past several centuries, the game, rules, playing field and scale of
architecture have changed. Among the changes:
• Buildings and their production are more complex.
• Although we still refer to monolithic built fields of any size as buildings, their scale of
intervention now often effectively straddles the urban and building levels.
• Buildings are now networked and technically complex.
• They require highly coordinated design across many distinct disciplines.
• No one designs alone.
• Multi-party design often takes place asynchronously in dispersed locations.
• The design, manufacture and assembly of buildings are now systems-based and
occur in distinct spheres of production.
In the 21st century, the tools and approach popularized by Palladio continue to work
well … up to a certain point and scale. But the design methods and tool kit assembled
in the Renaissance and further refined through the Beaux Arts era and the Modern
Movement also have both a scalar limit and a threshold of complexity beyond which
they cease to work.
In pre-modern Paris or Rome, we observe occasional singular non-thematic buildings
or squares or formal avenues interspersed within a continuous built field. Within block
after block of everyday thematic urban fabric, adjacent buildings of a similar type often
start out alike. The accumulated differences grow more pronounced over the years, as
each building grows and adapts. The buildings and units are by definition sustainable:
They have continued to grow, transform and renew themselves and their urban context
decade after decade. Their unit interiors also grow more varied.
Such persistence is no accident: It is the product of a design ethos and organizational
approach developed over millennia to accommodate, structure and carefully bound
change across systems, environmental levels, disciplines and timescales. At the time of
Vitruvius, Rome − a city of 1,000,000 inhabitants − was filled with diverse units through-
out its fabric of mixed-use urban courtyard villas and 5- and 6-story walk up insulae.
In the 21st century, we design and build with countless advances. Yet we have grown
incapable of producing vital variety at the scale of our buildings, of designing 50 or 100
or 1500 custom units in any single building, in ways that offer residential tenants the
potential level of accommodation and customization built-into the fabric of the insulae
and tabernae of ancient Rome’s fine-grained mixed-use fabric.
Thematic Design at the Dawn of a New Millennium
![Page 239: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
230 AFTERWORD
The chapters and plays of this book ultimately converge at one question:
Historically, how have large, complex, vital and sustainable built fields come into being
under the hands of multiple players, and what has changed?
The answer bring us full circle to once more observing long-term patterns of environ-
mental transformation.
Buildings that bridge the urban and building levels of the built environment
Urban-scale buildings − train stations, exhibition halls, covered markets, factories and
institutional buildings − grew commonplace in the 19th century. Servicing them within
expanding cities required branching urban networks of utilities: Modern versions of
the roads, aqueducts, viaducts, storm and wastewater sewer systems and indoor heat-
ing and plumbing that had served Imperial Rome were joined by electricity, gas, tele-
graph, telephone, air conditioning, security, LANs and Internet connectivity, etc.
The new building types, their scale of intervention and inclusion of increasing numbers
of utility networks embodied overarching changes in society, in its hierarchical, techni-
cal and social organization and scale. Development planning for such large projects
involved financial, social and technical infrastructures, interest groups, hierarchies
workforces, costs and levels of coordination commonly associated with urban design.
For many reasons, buildings whose scale bridges architecture and urban design
were rare in the past. They now account for the majority of investment in professional
architecture, its design and construction. Vast and ever-changing networks of service
systems within operate at multiple environmental levels in service to increasingly
mobile tenants. And, of course, sustainability, conservation, resource management
and stewardship are fundamental issues on a planet inhabited by more than seven
billion people. All of this requires buildings and systems that are more open-ended,
coordinated and choreographed than in the past.
![Page 240: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
STRUCTURED OBSERVATION 231
This concluding observational research occurs at the urban scale. It is intended for
group performance.
Procedure
• Observe and record change in a vibrant, thriving everyday neighborhood that you like −
one that has accumulated layers of interventions large and small over successive eras.
• Observe the broad characteristic outlines of its structure and fabric. At what intersec-
tions of levels, forms, systems and elements does transformation typically occur? What
consistent structural patterns does it reveal?
• If possible, interview local residents about the neighborhood’s key characteristics and
most desirable elements.
• Record your observations − including the neighborhood’s defining building patterns,
types and systems.
• After your observation is concluded, analyze and summarize the inherent capacity and
potential for future change of the neighborhood, the block and the individual buildings.
• Present your findings.
Focus
• Focus on the physical evidence of dialogue between evolving everyday life, physical
form and numerous designers.
• Observe in particular, the zone that extends from the façade to the street curb, and
from street level upward for 1–2 stories.
• Pay particular attention to architectural systems as coherent autonomous units of
design intervention that reveal change.
• Try to observe transformation through the lens of the seven preceding plays.
Questions
What systemic similarities extend across multiple buildings?
What particular combinations of systems are most evident?
What signs reveal the hierarchical relationship between various systems (i.e., which
systems, when changed, force other systems to change)?
What combinations of factors make a given urban district, street, building complex or
individual building desirable?
Structured Observation
Looking for signs
![Page 241: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
232 AFTERWORD
How many of the contributing factors you have identified have little or nothing to do with
aesthetic design?
What, in spite of messy vitality and variation, keeps the urban fabric coherent?
What universal characteristics do even relatively disparate forms share in common?
Which combinations of systems embody local and cultural preferences?
What physical signs point to different individuals electing to build and/or inhabit space
in similar ways?
What changes over time occur primarily in response to inhabitation, rather than techni-
cal obsolescence or wear and tear?
Take it to the next step
• Observe a collection of large new buildings with some architectural merit, buildings
that straddle the building and urban scale. They will most likely be located outside
the historic city center.
• Proceed to document those buildings in the same manner as above, looking for
signs of underlying structure revealed by transformation.
• Compare and contrast the qualities and capacities for accommodation and transfor-
mation of the two fabrics.
• During almost a century of research and practice, a vast and quite varied body of
knowledge has emerged regarding alternative ways to organize building design
processes and methods, and to construct buildings and details in ways that foster
lower level bottom-up freedom to build and increase capacity for tenant-generated
unit-by-unit customization. Identify and research some of the milestone projects and
the innovations they incorporate.
![Page 242: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
BEYOND CONVERSATIONS WITH FORM 233
Historically, the design and production of form has been primarily shaped not by indi-
vidual vision, but by interwoven and overlapping hierarchical constructional, sociocul-
tural and territorial structures and systems networks.
The smaller-scale and finer-grained environmental fabrics of prior eras were intrinsi-
cally structured to accommodate design by many players − simultaneously or asyn-
chronously, side by side or remotely, on the same environmental level or on vastly
different levels − each within a bounded framework established on a higher level. One
major task of higher-level intervention consisted of defining the bounds of lower level
space within a creative framework, setting key parameters and constraints while leav-
ing creative completion of lower level design at the level of inhabitation open-ended.
Hierarchical dialogue at the points of intersection between the urban and building
levels and between the building and infill levels played an essential role in creating
well-ordered, sustainable, vital and accommodating buildings.
As individual building projects and their individually selected forms, configurations,
materials and systems approach the urban scale, their design processes and patterns
of design control frequently embody innately institutional − rather than environmental
− structures. The design of such buildings now primarily reflects a combination of top-
down decisions, regulatory control and market factors. As a result, spaces, façades,
built-up virtual urban structures, building types, forms and articulating details have
ceased to reflect a mosaic of acts of transformation at multiple levels.
Where essential bottom-up local building types and patterns, local thematic character
and environmental variety dwindle, the architecture that replaces them is not vital, in a
very literal sense: Smaller-scale variations in such urban-scale building forms reflect
an individual signature, not the additive effects of change wrought by everyday life and
its actors.
The larger context of thematic design
Conversations With Form has introduced a thematic design approach and accompa-
nying tools for the design of buildings. Throughout this book, design play has focused
on solo design, honing observational skills and discrete individual skills in crafting form.
The plays extend roughly up to the scale at which a single designer can convincingly
execute a complete building design.
Most architects in contemporary practice work at a somewhat larger scale, within a
process of environmental intervention that has been restructured to parallel top-down
management structures. There are clear advantages and efficiencies to working this
way at the new scale of society; and it enables the structure of architecture firms to
interface well with the structure of their institutional clients.
Beyond Conversations With Form
![Page 243: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
234 AFTERWORD
However, the most crucial scale at which environmental variety is created is the
human scale, the lower level that throughout the history of the built environment has
introduced vital bottom-up creativity and much-needed variation in order to human-
ize design. When individual designers lose the ability to design freely within expertly
conceived and bounded design frameworks and when inhabitants and end-users can
no longer customize their own environments, spaces and details become stereotypical,
repetitive, standardized and interchangeable. With each degree of separation between
those who shape and control design and those who actually execute the hands-on
design on a given environmental level, architecture grows increasingly constricted,
coarse, rigid and unresponsive. Carefully designed model solutions for individual
rooms, wings or floors are copied and pasted, replicated, arrayed and/or extruded
throughout a vast three-dimensional field with little or no differentiation for particu-
lar inhabitants or end-users or accommodation for particular uses, needs or prefer-
ences. The underlying physical, technical and social organization of design frequently
prevents or discourages individualization.
Methodological frameworks
Which aspects of standard studio project design methods transfer seamlessly to the
design of urban-scale collective form?
Where and how do those methods break down?
In the 21st century, how can we design, build and nurture fabrics that are as accom-
modating and enabling as the most beloved cities, towns, neighborhoods, buildings and
individual dwellings handed down to us from past eras − without sacrificing our current
gains or restructuring society?
If designers are to once more jointly create vital and sustainable buildings at the new
scale of intervention, we must once again share certain bottom line assumptions and
agreements about form and how to build upon what is already in place, utilizing certain
additional tools and design methods. Taken together, the specific methods that allow
designers to create complex and open-ended multi-level built environment in theme
and variation, within the broader context and timeframes of social, physical, territorial
and technical structures, can pave the way for common understanding and mastery.
The environmental impact of thematic design is most evident at the urban scale of
contemporary buildings. That scale at which most investment in professional architec-
ture now occurs, is the point at which this part of the story concludes. The painstak-
ing choreography necessary to synchronize so many performers makes the need for
rationalized coordination of design unequivocal:
It requires appropriate design methods.
And that is the point.
![Page 244: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
BEYOND CONVERSATIONS WITH FORM 235
In a 21st century world of architecture whose hands-on practice would be unrecogniz-
able to Imhotep, Vitruvius, Palladio or even Frank Lloyd Wright, the tools and methods
of thematic design ultimately work toward re-establishing the natural and historical
relationship between individual and place. Their aim is to help restore both harmony
and variety throughout urban fields and from building to building; to create long-lived
places that current inhabitants or designers who follow may also freely transform; to
allow each set of hands to join in; to shape a larger built environment that is far more
than the sum of its parts.
![Page 245: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
236
0.40 Factory, single-family and multifamily housing
and mixed use along a canal, Amsterdam.
Copyrighted photo by Andrés Mignucci
![Page 246: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
237
Consider this hypothetical scenario:
You have demonstrated exceptional design ability and hands-on understanding of
thematic design methods, skills and tools, appropriately drawing upon observed prece-
dent in designing forward without nostalgia within existing urban fabric. The Redevelop-
ment Authority you first encountered at the begining of the book has accordingly invited
you to compete for a mixed-use project that bridges the building and urban scales: The
Planning Office and neighborhood coalition of stakeholders have approved plans to
demolish early 20th century buildings along the banks of an unspecified canal, consoli-
date lots and create a mixed-use project beyond the urban core. The architecture must:
• reflect an unapologetically contemporary sensibility, sustainability and urban approach;
• anticipate, accommodate, adjust, adapt and evolve in response to accelerating change
in urban patterns, demographics, tenants, uses, lifestyles and expectations; and
• fit in with the historic neighborhood and fabric. Co-existing is not enough: It must build
upon, repair and extend rather than diminish neighborhood coherence.
In addition:
• The new building complex must be designed and constructed to last 100–200 years.
• It must possess strong architectural character inside and out.
• Each custom unit will be created by a different designer with a great deal of freedom.
• Demised premises will expand and contract throughout the life of the building. Uses,
sizes, layouts and systems must remain continuously changeable.
• Interiors must be able to freely and independently change at will. Work involving the
walls, systems, appliances, fixtures etc. of individual tenancies must be self-contained:
Routinely reconfiguring, maintaining, upgrading or replacing room layouts, partitions,
systems or fixtures must never prove unviable or impact abutting units.
What additional background − specific hands-on methods and skills, discrete bodies of
knowledge, etc. − will you build upon to succeed in this large-scale intervention?
How will you structure the project and process to integrate the work of many hands
working at varied levels and time frames throughout design and construction?
How will the design actively promote fine-grained bottom-up variety and continuous
change created by individual tenants and inhabitants?
To what extent will variety within be expressed in the public face of the complex?
Should individual units be able to grow out beyond, customize or mark façades? If so,
how will they accomplish this physically and what are the implications?
Closing Scenario
![Page 247: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
This page intentionally left blank
![Page 248: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
ADDITIONAL READING 239
Additional Reading
Related publications by N. John Habraken
Habraken, N. John, General Principles about the Way Built Environments Exist. Open House Blue Cover
Booklet Issue 1. Eindhoven: SAR, 1979
“Notes of a Traveler: On the dilemmas of the researcher in architectural design methodology,” Journal
of Architectural Education, 32, 4–7. Washington, D.C.: Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture,
1979
with J. A. Aldrete-Haas, R. Chow, T. Hille, P. Krugmeier, M. Lampkin, A. Mallows, A. Mignucci, Y.
Takase, K. Weller and T. Yokouchi, The Grunsfeld Variations: A demonstration project on the coordination
of a design team in urban design. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Grunsfeld Foundation / MIT Laboratory of
Architecture & Planning, 1981
Transformations of the Site. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Awater Press, 1983
The Appearance of the Form: Four essays on the position designing takes between people and things.
2nd edition. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Awater Press, 1985
“Reconciling variety and efficiency in large-scale projects,” in Large Housing Projects: Design,
Technology, and Logistics: Designing in Islamic Cultures 5, Margaret Bentley Sevcenko, editor, 46–53.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: Aga Khan Project for Islamic Architecture, 1985
“The Control of Complexity,” Places, 4 (2), 3–15, Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1987
“Control Hierarchies in Complex Artifacts,” Proceedings, Conference on Planning and Design in
Architecture. Jean-Pierre Protzen, editor. Boston: International Congress on Planning and Design Theory,
1987
edited by Jonathan Teicher, The Structure of the Ordinary: Form and Control in the Built Environment.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1998
“Type as a Social Agreement,” Proceedings of the Third Asian Congress of Architects. Seoul: Third
Asian Congress of Architects, Nov. 1988
“Tools of the Trade: Thematic Aspects of Designing.” Draft report. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT
Department of Architecture, 1995. Available for download at www.habraken.com
edited by Jonathan Teicher, Palladio’s Children: Essays on Everyday Environment and the Architect,
London: Taylor & Francis, 2005
and Mignucci, Andrés, with an introduction by Josep Maria Montaner and Zaida Muxi, Supports:
Housing and City. Barcelona: Fundación Politécnica de Catalunya, 2009
![Page 249: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
240 ADDITIONAL READING
Recommended background reading – general reference and topical
Alexander, Christopher, A Pattern Language: Towns, buildings, construction. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1964
Bachelard, Gaston, Poetics of Space. Boston: Beacon Press, 1994
Davis, Howard, The Culture of Building. New York: Oxford University Press, 2006
De Quincy, Quatremere, A. C., translated by Samir Younés, The Historical Dictionary of Architecture. London:
Andreas Papadakis, 1999
Frampton, Kenneth, Studies in Tectonic Culture: The poetics of construction in nineteenth and twentieth
century architecture. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1995
Hertzberger, Herman, Lessons for Students in Architecture. Rotterdam: 010 Publishers, 1991
Space and the Architect: Lessons for students in architecture 2. Rotterdam: 010 Publishers, 2000
Palladio, Andrea, The Four Books on Architecture, translated by Robert Tavernor and Richard Schofield.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1997
Plummer, Henry, The Architecture of Natural Light. New York: Monacelli Press, 2009
Rapoport, Amos, House Form and Culture. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1969
Rudofsky, Bernard, Architecture Without Architects: A short introduction to non-pedigreed architecture.
Albuquerque, New Mexico: University of New Mexico Press, 1987
Schön, Donald A., The Reflective Practitioner: How professionals think in action, London: Temple Smith, 1983
Vitruvius Pollio, Marcus, translated by Morris Hicky Morgan, The Ten Books on Architecture. Minneola, New
York: Courier Dover Publications, 1960
Readings cited or implicitly referenced, by chapter of first mention
INTRODUCTION
Andrade, Jorge, Santamaría, Rodolfo and Govela, Alfonso, “Transformación de un entorno urbano: Santa
Ursula 1950–1977” in Arquitectura y Sociedad, no. 10, 27–31. México, D. F. : Universidad AutoÌnoma
Metropolitana, 1978
Brand, Stewart. How Buildings Learn: What happens after they’re built. USA: Viking/Penguin, 1994
Chastain, Thomas and Chow, Renee, “Observations of Turfan,” Places 4 (2), 21–32. Cambridge,
Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1987
Dubiez, F. J., Cornelis Anthoniszoon van Amsterdam: Zijn leven en werken ca. 1507–1553 [Cornelis
Anthoniszoon of Amsterdam: His life and works ca. 1507–1553]. Amsterdam: H. D. L’fann, 1969
Letarouilly, Paul Marie, Edifices de Rome Moderne. Paris: Bance, 1860
Olson, Charles, The Collected Poems of Charles Olson. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1987
Perec, Georges, Species of Spaces and Other Pieces. London: Penguin Classics, 1989
![Page 250: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
ADDITIONAL READING 241
Reps, John W., Cities of the American West: A history of frontier urban planning. Princeton, New Jersey:
Princeton University Press, 1972
Pérez de Arce, Rodrigo, Urban Transformations. London: Architectural Association Publications, 1980
van Rooijen, A., De Oude Kerk te Amsterdam in vogelvlucht (A Bird’s Eye View of The Old Church of
Amsterdam). Amsterdam: Stichting Oude Kerk te Amsterdam,1985
CHAPTER 1
Benjamin, Asher, The American Builder’s Companion. Mineola, New York: Dover, 2009
Carver Jr., Norman, Japanese Folkhouses. Kalamazoo, Michigan: Documan Press,1984
CHAPTER 2
Frings, Marcus, “The Golden Section in Architectural Theory,” Nexus Network Journal, vol. 4 no. 1, 9–32.
Florence: Nexus Network Journal, 2002
Hille, R. Thomas, Understanding and Transforming What’s There: A look at the formal rule structure of the
residential façade zone in Victorian San Francisco. MIT thesis. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT, 1982
Le Corbusier, The Modulor: A Harmonious Measure to the Human Scale Universally Applicable to Architecture
and Mechanics. Basel & Boston: Birkhäuser, 2004
Mignucci, Andrés, Projective Architecture: Studies toward the meaning and generative language of associative
built form. MIT thesis. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT, 1982
Moudon, Anne Vernez, Built for Change: Neighborhood architecture in San Francisco, Cambridge,
Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1989
Neufert, Ernst. Vincent Jones, general editor. Architects’ Data, Second (International) English edition. Oxford:
Blackwell Scientific Publications, 1980
Zeising, Adolf, Neue Lehre von den Proportionen des menschlichen Körpers: aus einem bisher unerkannt
gebliebenen, die ganze natur und kunst durchdringenden morphologischen grundgesetze entwickelt und mit
einer volständigen historischen uebersicht der bisherigen systeme begleitet [New Theory of Proportions of the
Human Body: Developed from previously unrecognized basic laws of morphology throughout nature and art,
accompanied by a full historical overview of the previous systems]. Leipzig: R. Weigel, 1854
CHAPTER 4
Bosma, Koos, van Hoogstraten, Dorine and Vos, Martijn, Housing for the Millions: John Habraken and the SAR
(1960–2000). Rotterdam: NAi Publishers, 2000
Price, Lorna, The Plan of St. Gall in Brief: An overview of the three-volume work by Walter Horn and Ernest
Born. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1982
Sheine, Judith, R. M. Schindler. London: Phaidon Press, 2001
Stichting Architecten Research (SAR) [Foundation for Architects’ Research], SAR65. Eindhoven: SAR, 1979
Toker, Franklin, Fallingwater Rising: Frank Lloyd Wright, E. J. Kaufmann, and America’s most extraordinary
house. New York: Knopf, 2007
![Page 251: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
242 ADDITIONAL READING
CHAPTER 6
Carver, Norman F., Jr., Form and Space in Japanese Architecture. Kalamazoo, Michigan: Documan Press, 1993
Cipriani, Giovanni Battista, Monumenti di fabbriche antiche estratti dai disegni dei piu celebri autori. Tomo III.
Rome: [s.n.], 1803
Engel, Heinrich, The Japanese House: A Tradition for Contemporary Architecture. North Clarendon, Vermont:
Charles E. Tuttle, 1964
Eliot, Thomas Stearns, “Hamlet and his problems,” The Sacred Wood. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1921
Rotne, Georg K. S. Da Verden var Ung: Modernisme og industriel arkitektur i Frankrig. Copenhagen:
Kunstakademiets Arkitektskoles Forlag [Royal Danish Academy of Fine Arts, School of Architecture Press],
2012
Sergeant, John, Frank Lloyd Wright’s Usonian Houses: The case for organic architecture. New York: Whitney
Library of Design, 1976
Frank Lloyd Wright’s Usonian Houses: Designs for moderate cost one-family homes. New York:
Watson-Guptill, 1984
Semper, Gottfried, The Four Elements of Architecture and Other Writings. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge
University Press, 2011
Smith, Maurice K., “Dimensional Self-Stability and Displacement in Field-Ordered Directional Alternations,”
Places, 5 (2), 72–86. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1988
Ware, Isaac, A Complete Body of Architecture: Adorned with plans and elevations, from original designs … in
which are interspersed some designs of Inigo Jones never before published. Farmington Hills, Michigan: Gale,
2010
Wright, Frank Lloyd, Ausgeführte Bauten und Entwürfe von Frank Lloyd Wright [The Wasmuth Portfolio]. Berlin:
Ernst Wasmuth, 1910
Xercavins i Valls, Enric, “La prefabricación en edificios singulares,” in Hormigón y Acero, no. 235 1er Trimestre.
Madrid: Asociación Científico-Técnica del Hormigón Estructural [Scientific-Technical Association for
Structural Concrete], 2005
CHAPTER 7
Plummer, Henry, The Potential House. Tokyo: Gingko Press, 1989
AFTERWORD
Adam, Robert, Ruins of the Palace of the Emperor Diocletian at Spalatro in Dalmatia. London: [s.n.], 1764
![Page 252: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
2/3rds rule 155
Abruña, Fernando 96
Adam, Robert 222
Amsterdam, Netherlands 2, 11–13, 23, 44, 97
Anthoniszoon, Cornelis 11
architects of record:
Aires Mateus 224, 224–5
Ando, Tadao 109, 109
Atelier 5 110, 110–1
Baumans-Deffet 201, 217
Behnisch & Partner 192, 192–3
Busmann + Haberer 138, 138
Campo Baeza 212, 212–13
Chareau, Pierre 190, 190–1
Coderch, José Antonio 64, 64
Correa, Charles 65, 65
De.Ar 95
Doshi, Balkrishna V. 167
du Cerceau, Jean 26
Erickson, Arthur 133, 133
Gaudí, Antonio 25, 188, 189
Hertzberger, Herman 157, 160, 160–1
Jones, E. Fay 178, 179
Jujol, Josep María 42
Kahn, Louis I. 113, 157, 158, 158–9
Krier, Leon 185
Le Corbusier 77, 112, 112, 139, 139, 155
Melnikov, Konstantin 139, 139
Mies Van der Rohe, Ludwig 155, 164, 165
Mignucci, Andrés 21, 66, 94
Onion Flats 94
Ortiz, Maribel 94
Palladio, Andrea 77, 185, 185, 228
Pezo von Ellrichshausen 178
Piano, Renzo 107
Richardson, H.H. 62
Rietveld, Gerrit 89, 158, 191
Rogers, Richard 107
Scarpa, Carlo 226, 227
Schindler, R.M. 116, 118, 130, 130, 139, 200
Smith, Maurice K. 214, 214–16, 217
Utzon, Jørn 92, 92
Wright, Frank Lloyd 107, 123, 123, 150, 152, 158, 186, 186–7
Zumthor, Peter 27, 218
architectural systems:
classicism 184–5, 184–5
Frank Lloyd Wright designs 186, 186–7
industrialized systems 188, 189–90, 190–2, 192–3
Kahn-Hertzberger variations 157–8, 157–9, 160, 160–1
tectonic and stereotomic form 178–9, 178–9
using and combining 169
vernacular 180–3, 180–3
assemblies:
building zones 83, 83
conceptual deconstruction 82, 82
hierarchy of 80
part-whole 81, 81
physical 220
Barcelona, Spain 25, 42, 64, 64, 188, 189
Bastia, Corsica 73
bay windows 23, 56, 57, 72, 73, 81, 83
Bern, Switzerland 110, 110–11
Betanzos, Spain 208, 209
Blaeu, Joan 2
Bologna, Italy 63, 63
Boston, Massachusetts, USA 62, 62, 72, 73
building codes 24
building planning tools, introduced 120
INDEX 243
Index
Page numbers in italics denote an illustration or illustration caption
![Page 253: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
244 INDEX
building program (building brief) 3, 6, 33–4, 40, 50, 78, 84, 87, 99,
102
building types:
defined 3
buildings, by type:
apartment:
Athens 95
Bastia, Corsica 73
Casa de La Marina, La Barceloneta, Barcelona 64, 64
Casa Milà (La Pedrera), Barcelona 188, 189
Casa Planells, Barcelona 42
Kanchanjunga, Mumbai 65, 65
barn:
Amish, Pennsylvania USA 119
tithe, Great Coxwell, England 132
basilica:
Sagrada Familia, Barcelona 25
Santa Maria Maggiore, Rome: 14, 14–15
canal house 2, 10, 22, 23, 23, 44, 97
cathedral:
St. Gall, St. Gallen, Switzerland 132
church:
Il Redentore, Venice 185
Kolumba, Cologne 27, 218
Old Church [Oude Kerk], Amsterdam 11, 11–13
Thorncrown Chapel, Eureka Springs, Arkansas, US 179
courtyard dwelling:
Turfan oasis settlement 28, 28
Casa Tavárez, San Juan, Puerto Rico 96
fire station:
Limbourg, Belgium 201
freestanding residential house:
Baizeau, Carthage, Tunisia 139, 139
Blackman No.1, Groton, Massachusetts, USA 214, 214–16
Blackman No. 2, Manchester, Massachusetts, USA 217
Capra (Rotonda), Vicenza 185
Casa em Alenquer, Portugal 224, 224–5
De Blas, Madrid 212, 212–13
Fallingwater, Bear Run, Pennsylvania, USA 123, 123
Jacobs, Madison, Wisconsin, USA 186
Krier, Seaside, Florida, USA 185
Lovell Beach, Newport Beach, California, USA [Schindler] 116,
118, 139, 139, 200
Darwin D. Martin, Buffalo, New York, USA 187
Melnikov, Moscow 139, 139
Poli, Peninsula de Coliumo, Chile 178
Pope-Leighey, Alexandria, Virginia, USA 187
Tischler, Los Angeles 130, 130–1
Violeta 113, San Juan Puerto Rico 66
Violeta 150, San Juan, Puerto Rico 94
hôtel particulier, Paris: 10
Hôtel de Sully, 26, 26, 191
Maison de Verre (Maison D’Alsace) 190, 190–1
institutional:
Centraal Beheer, Apeldoorn, Netherlands 160, 160–1
Hysolar Research Institute, Stuttgart 192, 192–3
Ministry of Social Welfare and Employment, Amsterdam 152
Sangath, Ahmedabad, India 167
Japanese, traditional wooden: 16, 67, 84, 182–3, 182–3, 191,
199, 200, 200
gassho zukuri style minka farmhouse, Ogimachi Village, Japan
200
Watanabe House, Tsuruoka, Japan 67
Yoshijima House sake brewery, Hida Takayama, Japan 182
laboratory:
Richards and Goddard Laboratories, Philadelphia 158, 158–9
museum:
Castelvecchio Museum, Verona 226
Guggenheim, New York 107
Kimbell Art Museum, Fort Worth, Texas, USA 113, 113
The Kolumba, Cologne 27, 218
Museum Ludwig and Philharmonic Hall, Cologne 138, 138
Pompidou, Paris 107
Museum of Anthropology, Vancouver 133, 133
palace:
Diocletian’s Palace, Split 222, 222
Katsura Imperial Palace, Kyoto 84
palazzo:
Querini Stampalia, Venice 226, 227
Olivetti Showroom, Venice 226, 227
Palazzo Vecchio, Florence 210–1, 210
performace space:
Opera House, Sydney 196
rectory:
Trinity Church Rectory, Boston 62
row house: 1, 10, 16, 16–17, 23, 34, 63
Azuma House, Osaka 109, 109
Back Bay, Boston 72
Betanzos, Galicia 208, 209
design convention and challenges 96–7, 108
design examples 109–10, 109–12, 112
design in longitudinal section 93–112, 114–115
hierarchy of space 96
Merchant’s House, Himeji 16, 16–17
Schröder House, Utrecht 84
Siedlung Halen, Bern 110, 110–11
structured observation task 114–15
Thin Flats, Philadelphia, 94
Unité d’Habitation, Marseille 112, 112
temple:
Pantheon 185
Victorian wooden house (San Francisco): 70, 74, 86, 86
school:
Ecole Fonds de Loup, Andrimont, Belgium 217
building zones 83, 83
![Page 254: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
INDEX 245
built environment:
coherence and invention 107–8
control of 4, 5–7, 8, 18
evolution of 3–7, 73–4
fine-grained 3–4, 7, 63, 87, 107, 180, 226, 229
inhabitation and use 50
layered interventions in 220–2, 222–5, 224, 226, 227, 228
non-thematic 4, 85
observing change within 10
signature add-ons 84, 84–5
space, assignment of 101–2
structure 2, 4, 10, 26, 29, 84, 86, 219, 222, 228–9, 231–4
thematic 3, 73–4, 84
unique sculptural form 107
built field see field, built
Cairo, Egypt 73, 73
capacity (environmental) 3, 7, 25, 228, 231–2
architectural systems 154, 169, 175
served space 50, 78, 96, 120
change:
bottom-up 3, 6–8, 25, 74, 232–4, 237
fine-grained 3–6, 181
Chastain, Thomas 28, 28
Chow, Renée 28, 28
classicism 184–5, 184–5
climatic conditions 102
coherence:
architectural systems 154, 157, 177 180, 183, 186
combining systems 200
cross-section, designing in 117, 119, 120, 125, 136
exterior elements 87, 90
interventions 226, 228
space allocation 100
urban fabric 107–8, 231
Colegio de Arquitectos y Arquitectos Paisajistas de Puerto Rico
(CAAPPR) 59
commodity 50
complexity:
architectural systems 154, 177, 180
built environment 3, 73, 221, 229–30, 234
combining systems 194, 198, 201
exterior add-ons 85
hierarchy of design 82
urban fabric 5
conceptual deconstruction 82, 82
continuity:
intervention 107–8
public space 210
recurring elements 118, 120, 127
roof, unifying structure 130, 136, 137
signature add-ons 85
vernacular systems 180
contraction 22
control:
of the built environment 6–7, 18
of change 4
of complexity 197–210
of design 33, 39, 76, 210, 219, 220, 233, 234
of form 8, 9, 20, 32, 33, 49
of territory 18, 26, 45, 54
Cuesta, Alexander 36–7
Dailey, Wendy 131
Dale, John R. 128–9, 128–9
del Toro, Alberto 96
design methods 6, 79, 87, 129, 154–5, 229, 234
design moves:
categorized 35
operationally defined 38
design plays:
principle features 32–4
teaching method 2, 7, 40–1
transformation sequence 36–7, 38–9
design sections 95
Eixample, Barcelona (Cerdà i Sunyer) 188, 189
Engel, Heinrich [Heino] 187
entresol 26, 26
entry porches 58–60, 60, 61
exterior wall:
claiming space inside 62–4, 62–4
expansion into interior 66–7, 67
terraces 65, 65
façade:
changes to 23
element library 87, 87
public/private space 54–5, 97
stacking systems 208, 209–11, 210
territorial claim 56, 56–7
façade systems, stacking 208, 209, 210, 211
field, built:
directional 138, 138, 160, 163
non-directional 163
organizational strategies 158, 160, 163, 214
structuring light within 133, 135
Florence, Italy 210–11, 210–11, 223
form of enclosure 150
form of transition 45, 68–9
front yard:
Back Bay, Boston 52
El Vedado, Havana, Cuba 47
galeria acristalada 73, 209
![Page 255: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
246 INDEX
Goeree, Jan 11
Gryboyianni, Christina 103, 103–4
Hajian, Paul 28, 28
hands-on design moves:
categories 35
transformation sequence 36–7, 38–9
Havana, Cuba 47, 63, 63
Hida Takayama, Japan 182
hierarchy:
of assembly 80, 154
of design and construction 78, 82
of environmental levels 8, 18, 85, 233
of space 35, 82, 96, 100
of systems 204
Hille, R. Thomas 86, 87, 209
Himeji, Japan 16, 16–17
hilltowns 180–1, 180–1
industrialization in the built environment 70, 73–4
informal sector building 25, 74
inhabitation:
and change 232
and use 50
interaction among designers 8–9, 34, 35, 198
internal subdivision 22, 78
intervention, sphere of 8
Kahn-Hertzberger Variations 157–77
kits of parts 56, 87, 158, 161, 168, 169, 170
Kyoto, Japan 84, 84
levels (environmental) 18–28, 30, 177, 194, 220–6, 229–34, 237
and exterior building form 76, 78, 85, 86, 91
inter-level relationships 8
zones of transition 68–99
light studies:
climatic influence 102
cross-sectional 126
directional form 113, 113
organizing function 133, 133, 138, 138
mashrabiya 73
Minami, Kazunobu 16, 16–17
mistakes, learning from 48, 49
model units 6
Mumbai, India 65, 65
negative capability (Keats) 49
observation:
common characteristics 26
field drawings 28–9
physical form 10
research tool 27
sequential transformation 11, 11–17, 14, 16
structured approach 30–1
ordering principles 10, 35, 72
Osaka, Japan 109, 109
Pantheon, Rome 185
Paris, France 10, 18–19, 19, 24, 26, 26, 73, 87, 107, 190–1, 229
part–whole assemblies 81, 91
patterns (Alexander): 1, 237
built environment 3, 7-8, 10, 228, 233
built form, changes to 22, 26, 29, 73–74, 84
design moves 35
row houses 114
vernacular systems 180
zone of transition 97
Pérez de Arce, Rodrigo 14, 15, 223
physical hierarchy, defined operationally 18
Plan of St. Gall 132
Ponce, Puerto Rico 58–60, 60
Pontevedra, Spain 57
positioning rules 87, 125, 181
precedent documentation 11, 11–17, 14, 16
primary volume 73, 78
proportion 77
reflective practice (Schön) 33
Rue Mallet-Stevens, Paris 87
running roofs 134, 135–6, 137
SAR (Stichting Architecten Research / Foundation for
Architects’ Research) 120
San Francisco, California, USA 70, 72, 86, 86, 140, 140
San Juan, Puerto Rico 44, 66, 82, 94, 96
Siedlung Halen, Bern, Switzerland 110, 110–11
signature add-ons 84, 84–5
squares, public:
Piazza della Signoria, Florence 209–11, 210
Place des Vosges, Paris 18, 19
Plaza de la Leña, Pontevedra, Spain 57, 57
Plaza Mayor, Madrid 20, 20
Public Plaza, Isabela, Puerto Rico 21
squatter settlements 25
sustainability 1, 6–8, 50, 221, 229–30, 233–4, 237
![Page 256: 0415702526.pdf](https://reader030.vdocuments.us/reader030/viewer/2022020800/55cf8fe3550346703ba0f028/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
INDEX 247
systems, defined 154
tartan grid 120
tectonic and stereotomic form 178–9, 178–9
combined: 212, 212–16, 214
territory:
claiming 56, 57, 62–3, 62–3, 64–7
exterior space within 64–5, 64–5
façade plane 56, 56–7
public/private space 54–5, 62–3
threshold expansion 62–3, 62–3
thematic built environment, defined 3
thematic design:
constraints, working with 219
design analysis 86, 86
design control, effect of 233–5
development trends 229–30
space, assignment of 96, 102
thematic variants 60, 86, 87
theme and variation: 3, 41, 234
façade 23, 56
kits of parts 70, 87
vernacular systems 180–1, 186
zones of transition 68, 91, 177
timber barn building 119, 132
tokonoma 84, 84
top-down design 7, 87, 102, 233
transformation:
building level 22–4, 23, 224, 224–5
building over time 25–6, 25–7, 27
exterior articulation 73–4
frameworks 228
infill level 226, 227
room level 24
sequential 11, 11–15, 14, 16, 16–7
urban level 18, 19–21, 20, 222, 222–3
transition see form of transition, zone of transition
transformation sequence:
introduced 38
tripartite zoning 128–9, 128–9, 132, 132
Tsuruoka, Japan 67
Turfan oasis, China 28, 28
two-step design and building processes 72, 75, 90, 150
type see building type
urban fabric: 19, 24
Amsterdam 2, 11
Arab-Islamic Marrakech 19
coherence of 107
complexity of 5
Florence 223
Havana contrasted with Bologna 63
historical changes 3–7, 222, 222–3
level of transformation 18–24, 19–21, 23
Lucca 223
Paris 19
regional 84
Split (Spalato), Croatia 222
vernacular building:
design precedent 58–61, 60
Japanese wooden houses 182–3, 182–3
local site conditions 180–1, 180–1
vertical building zones 83
visualizing design 123
Vitruvius 50, 77
willing suspension of disbelief (Coleridge) 168
zone of transition 43–70, 97, 100, 204, 205, 208, 209